Form 485BPOS LINCOLN NATIONAL VARIABL

April 17, 2025 3:02 PM EDT
As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 17, 2025
1933 Act Registration No. 333-35780
1940 Act Registration No. 811-05721
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM N-4
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
POST-EFFECTIVE AMENDMENT NO. 62
and
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
AMENDMENT NO. 745
Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H
(Exact Name of Registrant)
American Legacy III® Plus
THE LINCOLN NATIONAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
(Name of Depositor)
1301 South Harrison Street
Post Office Box 1110
Fort Wayne, Indiana 46801
(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Offices)
Depositor’s Telephone Number, Including Area Code: (260) 455-2000
Craig T. Beazer, Esquire
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
150 North Radnor Chester Road
Radnor, PA 19087
(Name and Address of Agent for Service)
Copy to:
Carolyn E. Augur, Esquire
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
350 Church Street
Hartford, Connecticut 06103
Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: Continuous
It is proposed that this filing will become effective:
/ / immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
/X/ on May 1, 2025, pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
/ / 60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485
/ / on __________, pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485
Title of Securities being registered:
Interests in a separate account under individual flexible payment deferred variable annuity contracts.
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H
Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2025
This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit rates and percentages that we are currently offering. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.
The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on and after May 1, 2025.
The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded at any time. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge Rate 
 
Single Life
Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge*
1.55%
1.75%
*The charge is added to the product charge which included the mortality and expense risk charge for the death benefit you have elected.
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit 
Single Life GIB Percentage
Joint Life GIB Percentage
Age
GIB Percentage
Age
GIB Percentage
Under 40
2.25%
Under 40
2.00%
40 – 54
3.00%
40 – 54
2.50%
55 – 58
3.25%
55 – 58
2.75%
59 – 64
4.00%
59 – 64
3.50%
65 – 69
5.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 79
5.25%
70 – 79
4.75%
80+
5.25%
80+
4.75%
 
In order to receive the rate indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed and dated on and after May 1, 2025. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.
*Purchasers of Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage (regardless of the rider effective date) may use any remaining Guaranteed Amount (if greater than the Account Value) to calculate the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.
American Legacy III® Plus
Individual Variable Annuity Contracts
Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H 
May 1, 2025
Home Office:
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
1301 South Harrison Street
Fort Wayne, IN 46802
1-800-942-5500
www.LincolnFinancial.com
This prospectus describes an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company). This Contract can be purchased primarily as either a nonqualified annuity or qualified retirement annuity under Section 408 (IRAs) and 408A (Roth IRAs) of the tax code. Generally, you do not pay federal income tax on the Contract's growth until it is paid out. You receive tax deferral for an IRA, whether or not the funds are invested in an annuity contract. Further, if your Contract is a Roth IRA, you generally will not pay income tax on a distribution, provided certain conditions are met. Therefore, there should be reasons other than tax deferral for purchasing a qualified annuity contract.
The Contract is designed to accumulate Contract Value and to provide retirement income over a certain period of time, or for life, subject to certain conditions. The benefits offered under this Contract may be a variable or fixed amount, if available, or a combination of both. This Contract also offers a Death Benefit payable upon the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant. Certain benefits described in this prospectus are no longer available. The state in which your Contract is issued will govern whether or not certain features, riders, restrictions, limitations, charges and fees will apply to your Contract. All material state variations are discussed in this prospectus, however, non-material variations may not be discussed. You should refer to your Contract regarding state-specific features. Please check with your registered representative regarding availability.
The minimum initial Purchase Payment for the Contract is $10,000 ($25,000 for contracts purchased prior to November 15, 2010). Additional Purchase Payments may be made to the Contract, subject to certain restrictions, and must be at least $100 per payment ($25 if transmitted electronically) and at least $300 annually. We reserve the right to limit, restrict, or suspend Purchase Payments made to the Contract upon advance written notice.
Except as noted below, you choose whether your Contract Value accumulates on a variable or a fixed (guaranteed) basis or both. Your Contract may not offer a fixed account or if permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting Purchase Payments or transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. If any portion of your Contract Value is in the fixed account, we promise to pay you your principal and a minimum interest rate. We may impose restrictions on the fixed account for the life of your Contract or during certain periods. Also, an Interest Adjustment may be applied to any withdrawal, surrender, or transfer from the fixed account before the expiration date of a Guaranteed Period.
Expenses for contracts offering a Bonus or Persistency Credit may be higher than similar contracts without a Bonus or Persistency Credit. Because of this, the amount of the Bonus Credit may be more than offset by additional charges associated with the Bonus Credit.
All Purchase Payments, Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits for benefits on a variable basis will be placed in Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H (Variable Annuity Account [VAA]). You take all the investment risk on the Contract Value and the retirement income for amounts placed into one or more of the Contract’s variable options (“Subaccounts”), which, in turn, invest in corresponding underlying funds. If the Subaccounts you select make money, your Contract Value goes up; if they lose money, it goes down. How much it goes up or down depends on the performance of the Subaccounts you select. We do not guarantee how any of the Subaccounts or their funds will perform. Also, neither the U.S. Government nor any federal agency insures or guarantees your investment in the Contract. The contracts are not bank deposits and are not endorsed by any bank or government agency.
All prospectuses and other shareholder reports, will be made available on www.lfg.com/VAprospectus.
The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.
Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available online at Investor.gov.
1
Table of Contents 
Item
Page
3
5
7
9
11
13
16
19
20
21
22
23
26
27
30
36
36
40
47
49
52
53
59
59
59
60
60
60
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
2
Special Terms
In this prospectus, the following terms have the indicated meanings:
5% Enhancement—A feature under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage in which the Protected Income Base, minus Purchase Payments and corresponding Bonus Credits, received in the preceding Benefit Year, will be increased by 5%, subject to certain conditions.
Access Period—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, a defined period of time during which we make Regular Income Payments to you while you still have access to your Account Value. This means that you may make withdrawals, surrender the Contract, and have a Death Benefit.
Account or Variable Annuity Account (VAA)—The segregated investment account, Account H, into which we set aside and invest the assets for the variable side of the contract offered in this prospectus.
Account Value—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the initial Account Value is the Contract Value on the Valuation Date that i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or initial Purchase Payment if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, the Account Value on a Valuation Date equals the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, reduced by Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments and withdrawals.
Account Value Step-up—Under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage, the Protected Income Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary, subject to certain conditions.
Accumulation Unit—A measure used to calculate Contract Value for the variable side of the contract before the selection of an Annuity Payout option and to calculate the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value during the Access Period.
Annuitant—The person upon whose life the annuity benefit payments are based, and upon whose death a Death Benefit may be paid.
Annuity Commencement Date—The Valuation Date when funds are withdrawn or converted into Annuity Units or fixed dollar payout for payment of retirement income benefits under the Annuity Payout option you select (other than i4LIFE® Advantage) or upon beginning irrevocable withdrawals through an Automatic Withdrawal Service (state variations apply).
Annuity Payout—A regularly scheduled payment (under any of the available annuity options). Payments may be variable or fixed, or a combination of both.
Annuity Unit—A measure used to calculate the amount of Annuity Payouts for the variable side of the contract after the selection of an Annuity Payout option.
Beneficiary—The person you choose to receive any Death Benefit paid if you die before the selection of an Annuity Payout option.
Benefit Year—Under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. Under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, if the Contractowner elects a step-up, the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the step-up and each anniversary of the step-up after that.
Bonus Credit—The additional amount credited to the Contract for each Purchase Payment.
Contract—The variable annuity contract you have entered into with Lincoln Life.
Contractowner (you, your, owner)—The person who can exercise the rights within the Contract (decides on investment allocations, transfers, payout option, designates the Beneficiary, etc.). Usually, but not always, the Contractowner is the Annuitant.
Contract Value (may be referred to as Account Value in marketing materials)—At any given time before the selection of an Annuity Payout option, the total value of all Accumulation Units of a Contract, plus the value of the fixed side of the contract, if any.
Contract Year—Each 12-month period starting with the effective date of the Contract and starting with each contract anniversary after that.
Death Benefit—Before the selection of an Annuity Payout option, the amount payable to your designated Beneficiary if the Contractowner dies. As an alternative, the Contractowner may receive a Death Benefit on the death of the Annuitant prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option.
Excess Withdrawals—Amounts withdrawn during a Benefit Year, as specified for each Living Benefit Rider, which decrease or eliminate the guarantees under the rider.
Good Order—The actual receipt at our Home Office of the requested transaction in writing or by other means we accept, along with all information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. The forms we provide will identify the necessary documentation. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in Good Order, and we reserve the right to change or waive any Good Order requirements at any time.
Guaranteed Amount—The value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage.
3
Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option—A fixed Annuity Payout option available under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage under which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount for life.
Guaranteed Income Benefit—An option that provides a guaranteed minimum payout floor for the i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments. The calculation of the Guaranteed Income Benefit or the features applicable to the Guaranteed Income Benefit may vary based on the rider provisions applicable to certain Contractowners.
Guaranteed Period—The period during which Contract Value in a fixed account will be credited a guaranteed interest rate.
i4LIFE® Advantage Credit—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the additional amount credited to the Contract if both the minimum Access Period requirement and threshold value are met.
Interest Adjustment—An upward or downward adjustment on the amount of Contract Value in the fixed account upon a transfer, withdrawal or surrender of Contract Value from the fixed account due to fluctuations in interest rates.
Lifetime Income Period—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the period of time following the Access Period during which we make Regular Income Payments to you for the rest of your life (and Secondary Life, if applicable). During the Lifetime Income Period, you will no longer have access to your Account Value or receive a Death Benefit.
Investment Requirements—Restrictions in how you may allocate your Subaccount investments if you own certain Living Benefit Riders.
Lincoln Life (we, us, our, Company)—The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company.
Living Benefit Rider—A general reference to optional riders that provide some type of a minimum income guarantee while you are alive. If you own a Living Benefit Rider, Excess Withdrawals may have adverse effects on the benefit, and you may be subject to Investment Requirements.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal—The guaranteed periodic withdrawal available under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage.
Nursing Home Enhancement—A feature that will increase the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage upon admittance to an approved nursing care facility, subject to certain conditions.
Periodic Income Commencement Date—The Valuation Date on which the amount of i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments are determined.
Persistency Credit—The additional amount credited to the Contract after the fourteenth contract anniversary.
Protected Annual Income—(may be referred to as Guaranteed Annual Income or Maximum Annual Withdrawal in your Contract)—The guaranteed periodic withdrawal amount available from the Contract each Benefit Year for life under certain Living Benefit Riders.
Protected Annual Income Payout Option—(may be referred to as Guaranteed Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option or Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount Annuity Payout Option in your Contract)—A payout option available under certain Living Benefit Riders in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for life.
Protected Income Base—(may be referred to as Income Base in your Contract)—Under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and 4LATER® Advantage, the Protected Income Base will be used to calculate the minimum payouts available under your Contract at a later date. The amount of the Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider, and is adjusted as set forth in this prospectus.
Purchase Payments—Amounts paid into the Contract other than Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits.
Rate Sheet—A prospectus supplement, that will be filed periodically, where we declare the current Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages under i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit.
Regular Income Payments—The variable, periodic income payments paid under i4LIFE® Advantage.
Secondary Life—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the person designated by the Contractowner upon whose life the annuity payments will also be contingent.
Subaccount—Each portion of the VAA that reflects investments in Accumulation and Annuity Units of a class of a particular fund available under the contracts. There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each class of a fund.
Valuation Date—Each day the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) is open for trading.
Valuation Period—The period starting at the close of trading (normally 4:00 p.m. New York time) on each day that the NYSE is open for trading (Valuation Date) and ending at the close of such trading on the next Valuation Date.
4
Important Information You Should Consider About the American Legacy III® Plus Variable Annuity Contract 
 
FEES AND EXPENSES
Location in
Prospectus
Charges for Early
Withdrawals
A surrender charge may apply to a surrender or withdrawal of a Purchase Payment prior
to the 9th anniversary since the Purchase Payment was invested, up to 8.5% of the
amount withdrawn, declining to 0% over that time period. For example, if make a
withdrawal of $100,000 during the first year after your Purchase Payment, you could be
assessed a charge of up to $8,500 on the Purchase Payment withdrawn. A surrender
charge will not apply if your withdrawal is made after the 9th anniversary since a
Purchase Payment was invested.
●Fee Tables
●Examples
●Charges and
Other
Deductions –
Surrender
Charge
Transaction
Charges
None, other than surrender charges.
●Charges and
Other
Deductions
Ongoing Fees and
Expenses (annual
charges)
Minimum and Maximum Annual Fee Table. The table below describes the fees and
expenses that you may pay each year, depending on the options you choose. These
charges do not reflect Bonus Credits or Persistency Credits. Please refer to your
contract specifications page for information about the specific fees you will pay each
year based on the options you have elected.
●Fee Tables
●Examples
●Charges and
Other
Deductions
Annual Fee
Minimum
Maximum
 
Base Contract – Account Value Death
Benefit
1.52%1
1.52%1
 
 
Base Contract – Guarantee of Principal
Death Benefit
1.57%1
1.57%1
 
 
Base Contract – Enhanced Guaranteed
Minimum Death Benefit
1.82%1
1.82%1
 
 
Base Contract – Estate Enhancement
Benefit
2.02%1
2.02%1
 
 
Investment options (fund fees and
expenses)
0.53%1
1.14%1
 
 
Optional benefits available for an
additional charge (for a single optional
benefit, if elected)
0.40%1
2.45%2
 
 
1 As a percentage of average Account Value in the Subaccounts.
 
 
2 As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base.
 
 
Lowest and Highest Annual Cost Table. Because your Contract is customizable, the
choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of
owning your Contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could
pay each year. This estimate assumes that you do not take withdrawals from the
Contract, which could add surrender charges that substantially increase costs.
 
5
 
FEES AND EXPENSES
Location in
Prospectus
 
Lowest Annual Cost: $2,359
Highest Annual Cost: $5,792
 
 
Assumes:
Assumes:
 
 
●Investment of $100,000
●5% annual appreciation
●Least expensive fund fees and
expenses
●No optional benefits
●No surrender charges
●No additional Purchase Payments,
transfers, or withdrawals
●Investment of $100,000
●5% annual appreciation
●Most expensive combination of
optional benefits, fund fees and
expenses
●No surrender charges
●No additional Purchase Payments,
transfers, or withdrawals
 
 
RISKS
Location in
Prospectus
Risk of Loss
●You can lose money by investing in this Contract, including loss of principal.
●Principal Risks
●Investments of
the Variable
Annuity
Account
Not a Short-Term
Investment
●This Contract is not designed for short-term investing and is not appropriate for the
investor who needs ready access to cash.
●Withdrawals may result in surrender charges. If you take a withdrawal, any surrender
charge will reduce the value of your Contract or the amount of money that you
actually receive.
●The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and living benefit protections mean
the Contract is more beneficial to investors with a long-term investment horizon.
●Withdrawals are subject to ordinary income tax and may be subject to tax penalties.
●Principal Risks
●Surrender and
Withdrawals
●Fee Tables
●Charges and
Other
Deductions
●Living Benefit
Riders
Risks Associated
with Investment
Options
●An investment in this Contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance
of the investment options you choose. Performance can vary depending on the
performance of the investment options available under the Contract.
●Each investment option (including the fixed account option) has its own unique risks.
●You should review the investment options before making an investment decision.
●Principal Risks
●Investments of
the Variable
Annuity
Account
Insurance
Company Risks
●An investment in the Contract is subject to the risks related to Lincoln Life. Any
obligations (including under the fixed account option), guarantees, or benefits of the
Contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. If we experience financial distress,
we may not be able to meet our obligations to you. More information about Lincoln
Life, including our financial strength ratings, is available upon request by calling 1-
800-942-5500 or visiting www.LincolnFinancial.com.
●Principal Risks
 
RESTRICTIONS
Location in
Prospectus
Investments
●The frequency of transfers between investment options is restricted. There are also
restrictions on the minimum amount that may be transferred from a variable option
and the maximum amount that may be transferred from the fixed account option.
●We reserve the right to remove or substitute any funds as investment options that
are available under the Contract.
●If you elect certain optional benefits, you may be limited in the amount of Purchase
Payments that you can make (and when).
●You are generally restricted to no more than 12 transfers between investment options
per Contract Year. Your ability to transfer between investment options may also be
restricted as a result of Investment Requirements if you have elected an optional
benefit.
●Principal Risks
●Investments of
the Variable
Annuity
Account
6
 
RESTRICTIONS
Location in
Prospectus
Optional Benefits
●Optional benefits may limit or restrict the investment options that you may select
under the Contract. We may change these restrictions in the future.
●Optional benefit availability may vary by state of issue or selling broker-dealer.
●Excess Withdrawals may reduce the value of an optional benefit by an amount
greater than the value withdrawn or result in termination of the benefit.
●You are required to have a certain level of Contract Value for some new rider
elections.
●We may modify or stop offering an optional benefit that is currently available at any
time.
●If you elect certain optional benefits, you may be limited in the amount of Purchase
Payments that you can make (and when).
●The Contracts
●Living Benefit
Riders
●Appendix B –
Investment
Requirements
●Appendix C –
Discontinued
Living Benefit
Riders
 
TAXES
Location in
Prospectus
Tax Implications
●Consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an investment in
and payments received under this Contract.
●If you purchase the Contract through a tax-qualified plan or IRA, you do not get any
additional tax benefit under the Contract.
●Earnings on your Contract are taxed at ordinary income tax rates when you withdraw
them, and you may have to pay a penalty if you take a withdrawal before age 59½.
●Federal Tax
Matters
 
CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
Location in
Prospectus
Investment
Professional
Compensation
●Your registered representative may receive compensation for selling this Contract to
you, both in the form of commissions and because we may share the revenue it
earns on this Contract with the professional’s firm. (Your investment professional
may be your broker, investment adviser, insurance agent, or someone else).
●This potential conflict of interest may influence your investment professional to
recommend this Contract over another investment.
●Distribution of
the Contracts
●Principal Risks
Exchanges
●If you already own a contract, some investment professionals may have a financial
incentive to offer you a new Contract in place of the one you own. You should only
exchange your contract if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and
risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new Contract rather
than continue to own your existing contract.
●The Contracts -
Replacement
of Existing
Insurance
Overview of the Contract
Purpose of the Contract
The American Legacy III® Plus variable annuity contract is designed to accumulate Contract Value and to provide income over a certain period of time or for life, subject to certain conditions. The Contract can supplement your retirement income by providing a stream of income payments during the payout phase. The Contract also offers a Death Benefit payable to your designated Beneficiaries upon the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant.
This Contract may be appropriate if you have a long-term investment horizon. It is not intended for people who may need to make early or frequent withdrawals or intend to engage in frequent trading in the Subaccounts.
Phases of the Contract
Your Contract has two phases: (1) an accumulation (savings) phase, prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option; and (2) a payout (income) phase, after the selection of an Annuity Payout option.
Accumulation (Savings) Phase. To help you accumulate assets during the accumulation phase, you can invest your payments and earnings in:
●
The variable options available under the Contract, each of which has an underlying mutual fund with its own investment objective, strategies, and risks; investment adviser(s); expense ratio; and performance history; and
●
A fixed account option, if available, which guarantees principal and a minimum interest rate.
7
A list of funds in which you currently can invest is provided in Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract.
Annuity (Income) Phase. You can elect to annuitize your Contract and turn your Contract Value into a stream of income payments (sometimes called Annuity Payouts), at which time the accumulation phase of the Contract ends. These payments may continue for a fixed period of years, for your entire life, or for the longer of a fixed period or your life. The payments may also be fixed or variable. Variable payments will vary based on the performance of the funds that you choose.
If you annuitize, your investments will be converted to income payments and you may no longer be able to choose to make withdrawals from your Contract. All benefits (including guaranteed minimum Death Benefits and living benefits) terminate upon annuitization.
However, several optional Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract provide lifetime income payments that may be guaranteed, and still allow you to make withdrawals and be eligible for a Death Benefit. Withdrawals that exceed a Protected Income Amount are Excess Withdrawals that will reduce and could eliminate the income payments and other benefits of the rider, including access to a Death Benefit.
Primary Features and Options of the Contract
Accessing your money. During the Accumulation Phase you can surrender the Contract or withdraw part of the Contract Value. If you withdraw early, you may have to pay a surrender charge, an Interest Adjustment may apply and/or you may incur a tax penalty if you are younger than 59½.
Tax treatment. You can transfer money between investment options without tax implications, and earnings (if any) on your investments are generally tax-deferred. You are taxed only when: (1) you take a withdrawal or surrender; (2) you receive an income payment from the Contract; or (3) upon payment of a Death Benefit.
Death Benefits. Your Contract includes a Death Benefit that will be paid upon the death of either the Contractowner or the Annuitant. Optional Death Benefits that pay different amounts and have different fees may be available. There is no guarantee that any optional Death Benefit will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time.
Optional Living Benefit Riders. For an additional fee, you may be able to purchase one of the Living Benefit Riders listed below. Each rider offers one of the following:
●
a minimum Annuity Payout:
●
i4LIFE® Advantage.
●
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.
The following Living Benefit Riders are no longer available:
●
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage,
●
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus,
●
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage,
●
4LATER® Advantage,
●
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (versions 1, 2, 3, 4).
These Living Benefit Riders provide different methods to take income from your Contract Value or receive lifetime payments and provide certain guarantees, regardless of the investment performance of the Contract. These guarantees are subject to certain conditions, as set forth elsewhere in the prospectus.
There is no guarantee that any Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage) will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time. Certain Living Benefit Riders guarantee a transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, even if that version is no longer available for election. Excess Withdrawals under certain Living Benefit Riders may result in a reduction or premature termination of those benefits or riders. If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. (These Investment Requirements are explained in Appendix B- Investment Requirements.)
Additional Services. The additional services listed below are available under the Contract for no additional charge (unless otherwise indicated).
●
Dollar-cost averaging (DCA) allows you to transfer amounts from the DCA fixed account, if available, or certain Subaccounts into other Subaccounts on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available.
●
Portfolio rebalancing is an option that restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of Contract Value allocated to each Subaccount.
●
Cross-Reinvestment allows you to automatically transfer the excess amount to another investment option when the amount invested in an investment option exceeds a baseline amount.
●
Automatic Withdrawal Service (AWS) provides for an automatic periodic withdrawal of your Contract Value. Withdrawals under AWS are subject to applicable surrender charges and applicable Interest Adjustments (as well as taxes and tax penalties).
8
Fee Tables
The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from the Contract. Please refer to your Contract Specifications page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.
The first table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the Contract, surrender or make withdrawals from the Contract, or transfer Contract Value between investment options, and/or the fixed account (if available). State premium taxes may also be deducted.
 
TRANSACTION EXPENSES
  
Surrender charge (as a percentage of Purchase Payments surrendered/withdrawn):1
8.50%
We may also apply an Interest Adjustment to amounts being withdrawn, surrendered or transferred from a Guaranteed
Period account (except for dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment, withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal amount under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage and Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage).
See Fixed Side of the Contract.
 
1
The surrender charge percentage is reduced over a 9-year period at the following rates: 8.5%, 8.5%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%. The later the redemption occurs, the lower the surrender charge with respect to that surrender or withdrawal. We may reduce or waive this charge in certain situations. See Charges and
Other Deductions – Surrender Charge.  
The next table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay each year during the time that you own the Contract (not including fund fees and expenses). If you choose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.
 
ANNUAL CONTRACT EXPENSES
  
Administrative Expense (Annual Account Fee):1
 
$35
 
 
 
Base Contract Expenses (as a percentage of average Account Value in the Subaccounts)2,3
 
 
Account Value Death Benefit
 
1.50%
Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit
 
1.55%
Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB)
 
1.80%
Estate Enhancement Benefit (EEB)
 
2.00%
 
Optional Benefit Expenses (Protected Lifetime Income Fees)
Single
Life
Joint
Life
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage:4
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
1.50%
1.50%
Current Charge
1.25%
1.25%
Additional Charge for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus
0.15%
0.15%
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option:5
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
1.50%
1.50%
Current Charge
1.00%
1.25%
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option:5
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
0.95%
N/A
Current Charge
0.95%
N/A
4LATER® Advantage:6
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
1.50%
N/A
Current Charge
0.90%
N/A
i4LIFE® Advantage:7
 
 
Current Charge
0.40%
0.40%
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit riders elected on and after August 19, 2024:8, 9
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
2.75%
2.75%
9
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit riders elected prior to August 19, 2024:9
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
2.25%
2.45%
Current Charge
1.10%
1.30%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4):9
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
2.00%
2.00%
Current Charge
0.95%
1.15%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3):10
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
1.50%
1.50%
Current Charge
0.95%
0.95%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2):10
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
1.50%
1.50%
Current Charge
0.75%
0.75%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1):10
 
 
Current Charge
0.50%
0.50%
1
During the accumulation phase, the account fee will be deducted from your Contract Value on each contract anniversary, or upon surrender of the Contract. The account fee will be waived if your Contract Value is $100,000 or more on the contract anniversary (or date of surrender). For contracts purchased prior to November 15, 2010, the account fee is $50 and will be waived if your Contract Value is $50,000 or more at the end of any particular year. This account fee may be less in some states and will be waived after the fifteenth Contract Year, regardless of your Contract Value. We do not assess the account fee on contracts issued before June 2, 2003.
2
For contracts purchased prior to June 6, 2005 (or later depending on state approval), the total annual charges are as follows: EEB 1.80%; EGMDB 1.60%; Guarantee of Principal 1.50%; Account Value N/A. In the event of a subsequent Death Benefit change, the charge will be based on the charges in effect at the time the Contract was purchased.
3
Each base contract expense includes an administrative charge of 0.10%.
4
As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups, 5% Enhancements and the 200% step-up and decreased for withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The current annual fee rate may increase to the current annual fee listed above upon the earlier of (a) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000. A discussion of the fees for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.
5
As an annualized percentage of the Guaranteed Amount, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits and step-ups and decreased for withdrawals. This charge is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above upon the next election of a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount. A discussion of the charges for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.
6
As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, automatic 15% enhancements, and Resets and decreased for withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Subaccounts on a quarterly basis. The protected lifetime income fee may increase to the current annual fee listed above upon the next election to reset the Protected Income Base. A discussion of the fees for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.
7
As a percentage of daily assets in the Subaccounts. This charge is assessed only on and after the effective date of i4LIFE® Advantage and is added to your base contract expense. These charges continue during the Access Period. During the Lifetime Income Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage of 0.40% is added to the Account Value Death Benefit. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Charge for further information.
8
The current charge for new elections of this rider is disclosed in a Rate Sheet. The rates and/or percentages from previous effective periods are included in an Appendix to this prospectus.
9
These charges are added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge to comprise the total charges. During the Lifetime Income Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate is the Account Value Death Benefit base contract expense plus the i4LIFE® Advantage charge. The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above upon the next automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit. See Charges and Other Deductions - i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for more information.
10
This charge is added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge to comprise the total charges. During the Lifetime Income Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate is added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate of 1.65%. The current annual charge rate for versions 2 and 3 may increase periodically to the rate listed above if you elect an additional step-up period. See Charges and Other Deductions - i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for further
information. i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is only available within contracts purchased prior to June 30, 2009.  
10
The next item shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses charged by the funds that you may pay periodically during the time that you own the Contract. Expenses shown may change over time and may be higher or lower in the future. A complete list of funds available under the Contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in an appendix to this prospectus. See Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract. 
Annual Fund Expenses
Minimum
Maximum
Expenses that are deducted from the fund assets, including
management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other
expenses before reimbursements.
0.53
%
1.14
%
Expenses that are deducted from the fund assets, including
management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other
expenses after any waivers or expense reimbursements.1
0.48
%
1.10
%
1
Any expense waivers or reimbursements will remain in effect until at least April 30, 2026, and can only be terminated early with approval by the fund’s board of directors.
EXAMPLES
The following Examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include transaction expenses, contract fees, annual contract expenses, and annual fund fees and expenses.
The first Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year, the maximum fees and expenses of any of the funds, and that EEB Death Benefit and Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage at the guaranteed maximum charge are in effect. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:
1) If you surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 
1 year
3 years
5 years
10 years
$13,196
$22,388
$30,464
$51,246
2) If you annuitize or do not surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 
1 year
3 years
5 years
10 years
$4,696
$14,388
$24,464
$51,246
The next Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year, the maximum fees and expenses of any of the funds and that i4LIFE® Advantage with the EGMDB and Select Guaranteed Income Benefit at the guaranteed maximum charge are in effect. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:
1) If you surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 
1 year
3 years
5 years
10 years
$14,557
$26,039
$35,755
$57,915
2) If you annuitize or do not surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 
1 year
3 years
5 years
10 years
$6,057
$18,039
$29,755
$57,915
For more information, see Charges and Other Deductions in this prospectus, and the prospectus for the funds. Premium taxes may also apply, although they do not appear in the examples. The examples do not reflect Bonus Credits, Persistency Credits, or i4LIFE® Advantage Credits. Different fees and expenses not reflected in the examples may be imposed during a period in which Annuity Payouts are made. See Annuity Payouts. These examples should not be considered a representation of past or future expenses. Actual expenses may be more or less than those shown.
Principal Risks
The principal risks of investing in the Contract include:
11
Risk of Loss. You can lose money by investing in this Contract, including loss of principal. Neither the U.S. Government nor any federal agency insures or guarantees your investment in the Contract.
Short-Term Investment Risk. This Contract is not designed for short-term investing and is not appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash. The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and living benefit protections also mean that the Contract is more beneficial to investors with a long-term horizon.
Variable Option Risk. You take all the investment risk on the Contract Value and the retirement income for amounts placed into one or more of the Subaccounts, which invest in corresponding underlying funds. If the Subaccounts you select make money, your Contract Value goes up; if they lose money, your Contract Value goes down. How much it goes up or down depends on the performance of the Subaccounts you select. Each underlying fund is subject to its own investment risks. When you invest in a Subaccount, you are exposed to the investment risks of the underlying fund.
Investment Requirements Risk. If you elect an optional benefit, you may be subject to Investment Requirements, which means you may not be permitted to invest in certain investment options or you may be permitted to invest in certain investment options only to a limited extent. Failing to satisfy applicable Investment Requirements may result in the termination of your optional benefit. We impose Investment Requirements to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under an optional benefit. In turn, your compliance with the Investment Requirements could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and the value of your guaranteed benefits.
Managed Volatility Fund Risk. Certain underlying funds may employ risk management strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. These funds usually, but not always, have “Managed Risk” or “Managed Volatility” in the name of the fund. These strategies could limit the upside participation of the fund in rising equity markets relative to other funds. The optional Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract also provide protection in the event of a market downturn. Likewise, there are additional costs associated with these Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders, which can limit the Contract’s upside participation in the markets. Many of these funds are included in the Investment Requirements associated with certain Living Benefit Riders. Risk management strategies, in periods of high market volatility, could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and the value of your guaranteed benefits. For more information on these funds and their risk management strategies, please see the funds’ prospectuses.
Withdrawal Risk (Illiquidity Risk). You should carefully consider the risks associated with taking a withdrawal or surrender under the Contract. If you take a withdrawal or surrender the Contract, any applicable surrender charges will reduce the value of your Contract or the amount of money that you ultimately receive. The proceeds of your withdrawal or surrender may be subject to ordinary income taxes, including a tax penalty if you are younger than age 59½.
You should also consider the impact that a withdrawal may have on the standard and optional benefits under your Contract. For example, under certain Living Benefit Riders, excess or early withdrawals may reduce the value of the guaranteed benefit by an amount greater than the amount withdrawn and could result in termination of the benefit.
Transfer Risk. Your ability to transfer amounts between investment options is subject to restrictions. You are generally restricted to no more than 12 transfers per Contract Year. There are also restrictions on the minimum amount that may be transferred from a variable option and the maximum amount that may be transferred from the fixed account option. If permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. Your ability to transfer between investment options may also be restricted as a result of Investment Requirements if you have elected an optional benefit.
Purchase Payment Risk. Your ability to make additional Purchase Payments may be restricted under the Contract, depending on the version of the Contract that you own, the optional benefits that you have elected, and other factors.
Purchase Payments totaling $2 million or more are subject to Home Office approval. This amount takes into consideration the total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity contracts issued by the Company (or its affiliates) (excluding any version of Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level Advantage 2® contracts) for the same Contractowner, joint owner, and/or Annuitant.
Beginning May 19, 2025, Purchase Payments totaling $5 million or more are subject to Home Office approval ($2 million or more where a Living Benefit Rider or Death Benefit rider was elected excluding the Account Value Death Benefit and/or i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit). Both amounts take into consideration the total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity contracts issued by the Company (or its affiliates) (excluding all Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level Advantage 2® contracts) for the same Contractowner, joint owner, and/or Annuitant.
If you elect a Living Benefit Rider (other than any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit), after the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year.
If you elect any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, no additional Purchase Payments will be allowed at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit, no additional
12
Purchase Payments will be allowed after the Periodic Income Commencement Date for nonqualified contracts. For more information about these restrictions and limitations, see The Contracts – Purchase Payments.
Bonus Credit Risk. Expenses for contracts offering a Bonus Credit may be higher than similar contracts without a Bonus Credit. Because of this, the amount of the Bonus Credit may be more than offset by additional charges associated with the Bonus Credit.
Election of Optional Benefit Risk. There are a variety of optional benefits under the Contract that are designed for different financial goals and to protect against different financial risks. There is a risk that you may not choose the benefit or benefits that are best suited for you based on your present or future needs and circumstances. In addition, if you elect an optional benefit and do not use it, or if the contingencies upon which the benefit depend never occur, you will have paid for a benefit that did not provide a financial return. There is also a risk that a financial return of an optional benefit, if any, will ultimately be less than the amount you paid for the benefit. You should consult with your registered representative to determine which optional benefits (if any) are appropriate for you.
Fee and Expense Risk. You are subject to the risk that we may increase certain contract fees and charges, and that underlying fund expenses may increase.
Financial Strength and Claims-Paying Ability Risk. An investment in the Contract is subject to the risks related to us, Lincoln Life. Any obligations (including under the fixed account option), guarantees, or benefits of the Contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. If we experience financial distress, we may not be able to meet our obligations to you.
Cybersecurity and Business Interruption Risks. We rely heavily on our computer systems and those of our business partners and service providers to conduct our business. As such, our business is vulnerable to cybersecurity risks and business interruption risks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, loss, misuse, corruption and destruction of data; interference with or denial of service; attacks on websites or systems; operational disruptions; and unauthorized release of confidential customer or business information. Cybersecurity risks affecting us, any third-party administrators, underlying funds, index providers, intermediaries, and service providers may adversely affect us and/or your Contract. For instance, systems failures and cyberattacks may interfere with our processing of Contract transactions, including order processing; impact our ability to calculate Accumulation Unit values or other Contract values; cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information; and/or subject us to regulatory fines, litigation, financial losses or reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest (or the securities that compose an Index), which may cause your Contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that systems disruptions, cyberattacks and information security breaches will always be detected, prevented, or avoided in the future.
In addition to cybersecurity risks, we are exposed to risks related to natural and man-made disasters, such as (but not limited to) storms, fires, floods, earthquakes, public health crises, malicious acts, and terrorist acts. Any such disasters could interfere with our business and our ability to administer the Contract. For example, they could lead to delays in our processing of Contract transactions, including orders from Contract owners, or could negatively impact our ability to calculate Accumulation Unit values or other Contract Values. They may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest (or the securities that compose an Index), which may cause your Contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that negative impacts associated with natural and man-made disasters will always be avoided.
Financial Statements
The December 31, 2024 financial statements of the VAA and the December 31, 2024 consolidated financial statements of Lincoln Life are located in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI). Instructions on how to obtain a free copy of the SAI are provided on the last page of this prospectus.
Investments of the Variable Annuity Account
You decide the Subaccount(s) to which you allocate Purchase Payments. Bonus Credits are allocated to the Subaccounts at the same time and at the same percentage as the Purchase Payments being made. There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each class of each fund. You may change your allocation without penalty or charges. Shares of the funds will be sold at net asset value with no initial sales charge to the VAA in order to fund the contracts. The funds are required to redeem fund shares at net asset value upon our request.
Descriptions of the Funds
Information regarding each fund, including (1) its name, (2) its type or investment objective, (3) its investment adviser and any sub-investment adviser, (4) current expenses, and (5) performance is available in Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract. Each fund has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the fund. Paper or electronic copies of the fund prospectuses may be obtained by contacting our Home Office or visiting www.lfg.com/VAprospectus.
13
Certain Payments We Receive with Regard to the Funds
We (and/or our affiliates) incur expenses in promoting, marketing, and administering the contracts and the underlying funds. With respect to a fund, including affiliated funds, the adviser and/or distributor, or an affiliate thereof, may make payments to us (or an affiliate) for certain services we provide on behalf of the funds. Such services include, but are not limited to, recordkeeping; aggregating and processing purchase and redemption orders; providing Contractowners with statements showing their positions within the funds; processing dividend payments; providing subaccounting services for shares held by Contractowners; and forwarding shareholder communications, such as proxies, shareholder reports, dividend and tax notices, and printing and delivering prospectuses and updates to Contractowners. It is anticipated that such payments will be based on a percentage of assets of the particular fund attributable to the contracts along with certain other variable contracts issued or administered by us (or an affiliate). These percentages are negotiated and vary with each fund. Some advisers and/or distributors may pay us significantly more than other advisers and/or distributors and the amount we receive may be substantial. These percentages currently range up to 0.27%. We (or our affiliates) may profit from these payments. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the investment advisory fee deducted from fund assets. Contractowners, through their indirect investment in the funds, bear the costs of these investment advisory fees (see the funds' prospectuses for more information). Additionally, a fund's adviser and/or distributor or its affiliates may provide us with certain services that assist us in the distribution of the contracts and may pay us and/or certain affiliates amounts for marketing programs and sales support, as well as amounts to participate in training and sales meetings.
In addition to the payments described above, the American Funds and LVIP Funds offered as part of this Contract make payments to us under their distribution plans (12b-1 plans) for the marketing and distribution of fund shares. The payment rates range up to 0.35% based on the amount of assets invested in those funds. Payments made out of the assets of the fund will reduce the amount of assets that otherwise would be available for investment, and will reduce the fund's investment return. The dollar amount of future asset-based fees is not predictable because these fees are a percentage of the fund's average net assets, which can fluctuate over time. If, however, the value of the fund goes up, then so would the payment to us (or our affiliates). Conversely, if the value of the funds goes down, payments to us or our affiliates would decrease.
Selection of the Funds
We select the funds offered through the Contract based on several factors, including, without limitation, asset class coverage, the strength of the manager’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, performance, the capability and qualification of each sponsoring investment firm, and whether the fund is affiliated with us.
As noted above, a factor we may consider during the initial selection process is whether the fund (or an affiliate, investment adviser or distributor of the fund) being evaluated is an affiliate of ours and whether we are compensated for providing administrative, marketing, and/or support services that would otherwise be provided by the fund, its investment adviser or its distributor.
Some funds pay us significantly more than others and the amount we receive may be substantial. We often receive more revenue from an affiliated fund than one that is not affiliated with us. These factors give us an incentive to select a fund that yields more revenue, and this is often an affiliated fund.
We may also consider the ability of the fund to help manage volatility and our risks associated with the guarantees we provide under the Contract and under optional riders, especially the Living Benefit Riders.
We review each fund periodically after it is selected. We reserve the right to remove a fund or restrict allocation of additional Purchase Payments to a fund if we determine the fund no longer meets one or more of the factors and/or if the fund has not attracted significant Contractowner assets.
Finally, when we develop a variable annuity product in cooperation with a fund family or distributor (e.g., a “private label” product), we generally will include funds based on recommendations made by the fund family or distributor, whose selection criteria may differ from our selection criteria. Certain funds offered as part of this Contract have similar investment objectives and policies to other portfolios managed by the adviser. The investment results of the funds, however, may be higher or lower than the other portfolios that are managed by the adviser or sub-adviser. There can be no assurance, and no representation is made, that the investment results of any of the funds will be comparable to the investment results of any other portfolio managed by the adviser or sub-adviser, if applicable.
Certain funds invest their assets in other funds. As a result, you will pay fees and expenses at both fund levels. This will reduce your investment return. These arrangements are referred to as funds of funds or master-feeder funds, which may have higher expenses than funds that invest directly in debt or equity securities. An adviser affiliated with us manages some of the available funds of funds. Our affiliates may promote the benefits of such funds to Contractowners and/or suggest that Contractowners consider whether allocating some or all of their Contract Value to such portfolios is consistent with their desired investment objectives. In doing so, we may be subject to conflicts of interest insofar as we may derive greater revenues from the affiliated fund of funds than certain other funds available to you under your Contract.
Certain funds may employ risk management strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. These funds usually, but not always, have “Managed Risk” or “Managed Volatility” in the name of the fund. These
14
strategies could limit the upside participation of the fund in rising equity markets relative to other funds. The Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract also provide protection in the event of a market downturn. Risk management strategies, in periods of high market volatility, could limit your participation in market gains; this may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and, in turn, the value of any guaranteed benefit that is tied to investment performance.
For more information on these funds and their risk management strategies, please see the Investment Requirements section of this prospectus. You should consult with your registered representative to determine which combination of investment choices are appropriate for you.
Fund Shares
We will purchase shares of the funds at net asset value and direct them to the appropriate Subaccounts of the VAA. We will redeem sufficient shares of the appropriate funds to pay Annuity Payouts, Death Benefits, surrender/withdrawal proceeds or for other purposes described in the Contract. If you want to transfer all or part of your investment from one Subaccount to another, we may redeem shares held in the first Subaccount and purchase shares of the other. Redeemed shares are retired, but they may be reissued later.
Shares of the funds are not sold directly to the general public. They are sold to us, and may be sold to other insurance companies, for investment of the assets of the Subaccounts established by those insurance companies to fund variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts.
Reinvestment of Dividends and Capital Gain Distributions
All dividends and capital gain distributions of the funds are automatically reinvested in shares of the distributing funds at their net asset value on the date of distribution. Dividends are not paid out to Contractowners as additional units, but are reflected as changes in unit values.
Addition, Deletion or Substitution of Investments
We reserve the right, within the law, to make certain changes to the structure and operation of the VAA at our discretion and without your consent. We may add, delete, or substitute funds for all Contractowners or only for certain classes of Contractowners. New or substitute funds may have different fees and expenses, and may only be offered to certain classes of Contractowners.
Substitutions may be made with respect to existing investments or the investment of future Purchase Payments, or both. In the event of a substitution, the Contract Value allocated to the existing fund will be allocated to the substitute fund. Any future allocations to the substitute fund will automatically be allocated according to the instructions we have on file for you unless otherwise instructed by you. If we don’t have instructions from you on file, your Purchase Payments will be allocated to the substitute fund.
We may close Subaccounts to allocations of Purchase Payments or Contract Value, or both, at any time in our sole discretion. The funds, which sell their shares to the Subaccounts pursuant to participation agreements, also may terminate these agreements and discontinue offering their shares to the Subaccounts. In the event of a fund closure, any Contract Value you have invested in the closed fund will remain in that fund until you transfer it elsewhere. Any future allocation to the closed fund will be allocated in accordance with the instructions we have on file for you unless you instruct us otherwise.
In addition, a Subaccount may become unavailable due to the liquidation of its underlying fund portfolio. To the extent permitted by applicable law, upon notice to you and unless you otherwise instruct us, we will re-allocate any Contract Value in the liquidated fund to the money market subaccount. Any future allocations to the liquidated fund will automatically be allocated according to the instructions we have on file for you unless you instruct us otherwise.
From time to time, certain underlying funds may merge with other funds. If a merger of an underlying fund occurs, the Contract Value allocated to the existing fund will be merged into the surviving underlying fund. Any future allocations, including future Purchase Payments, to the merged fund will automatically be allocated to the surviving underlying fund unless you instruct us otherwise.
We may also:
●
remove, combine, or add Subaccounts and make the new Subaccounts available to you at our discretion;
●
transfer assets supporting the contracts from one Subaccount to another or from the VAA to another separate account;
●
combine the VAA with other separate accounts and/or create new separate accounts;
●
deregister the VAA under the 1940 Act; and
●
operate the VAA as a management investment company under the 1940 Act or as any other form permitted by law.
We may modify the provisions of the contracts to reflect changes to the Subaccounts and the VAA and to comply with applicable law. We will not make any changes without any necessary approval by the SEC. We will also provide you written notice.
15
Charges and Other Deductions
We will deduct the charges described below to cover our costs and expenses, services provided and risks assumed under the contracts. We incur certain costs and expenses for the distribution and administration of the contracts and for providing the benefits payable thereunder.
Our administrative services include:
●
processing applications for and issuing the contracts;
●
processing purchases and redemptions of fund shares as required (including dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment, portfolio rebalancing, and automatic withdrawal services – See Additional Services and the SAI for more information on these programs);
●
maintaining records;
●
administering Annuity Payouts;
●
furnishing accounting and valuation services (including the calculation and monitoring of daily Subaccount values);
●
reconciling and depositing cash receipts;
●
providing contract confirmations;
●
providing toll-free inquiry services; and
●
furnishing telephone and other electronic surrenders, withdrawals and fund transfer services.
The risks we assume include:
●
the risk that lifetime payments from Living Benefit Riders will exceed the Contract Value;
●
the risk that Death Benefits paid will exceed the actual Contract Value;
●
the risk that, if a Guaranteed Income Benefit rider is in effect, the required Regular Income Payments will exceed the Account Value;
●
the risk that Annuitants upon which Annuity Payouts are based live longer than we assumed when we calculated our guaranteed rates (these rates are incorporated in the Contract and cannot be changed);
●
the risk that more Contractowners than expected will qualify for waivers of the surrender charge; and
●
the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges (which we cannot change).
The amount of a charge may not necessarily correspond to the costs associated with providing the services or benefits indicated by the description of the charge. For example, the surrender charge collected may not fully cover all of the sales and distribution expenses actually incurred by us. Any remaining expenses will be paid from our general account which may consist, among other things, of proceeds derived from base contract expenses deducted from the account. A portion of the mortality and expense risk and administrative charge and a portion of the surrender charges are assessed to fully or partially recoup Bonus Credits paid into the Contract by us when Purchase Payments are made. We may profit from one or more of the fees and charges deducted under the Contract. We may use these profits for any corporate purpose, including financing the distribution of the contracts.
Obligations under the contracts that are funded by our general account (rather than the Variable Annuity Account) include (1) the obligation to make lifetime or other benefit payments under Living Benefit Riders that exceed the Contract Value; (2) the obligation to pay Death Benefits that exceed the Contract Value; (3) the obligation to pay Annuity Payouts that exceed the Contract Value. Payment of these benefits and obligations is subject to our claims-paying ability and financial strength. We are also responsible for providing for all of the administrative services necessary in connection with the contracts (and bearing all of the associated expenses).
Deductions from the VAA
A charge is applied to the average daily net asset value of the Subaccounts based on which Death Benefit you choose. Those charges are equal to an annual rate of: 
 
Estate
Enhancement
Benefit rider (EEB)
Enhanced Guaranteed
Minimum Death
Benefit (EGMDB)
Guarantee of
Principal Death
Benefit
Account Value
Death Benefit
Mortality and expense risk
charge
1.90
%
1.70
%
1.45
%
1.40
%
Administrative charge
0.10
%
0.10
%
0.10
%
0.10
%
Total base contract
expense*
2.00
%
1.80
%
1.55
%
1.50
%
* For contracts purchased before June 6, 2005 (or later in those states that had not approved the contract changes), the total base contract expenses are as follows: EEB 1.80%; EGMDB 1.60%; Guarantee of Principal 1.50%; Account Value N/A.
16
Surrender Charge
A surrender charge applies (except as described below) to surrenders and withdrawals of Purchase Payments that have been invested for the period below. The surrender charge is calculated separately for each Purchase Payment. The contract anniversary is the annually occurring date beginning with the effective date of the Contract. For example, if the effective date of your Contract is January 2nd, your contract anniversary would be on January 2nd of each subsequent year. 
 
Number of contract anniversaries since
Purchase Payment was invested
 
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9+
Surrender charge as a percentage of the
surrendered or withdrawn Purchase
Payments
8.50
%
8.50
%
8
%
7
%
6
%
5
%
4
%
3
%
2
%
0
%
A surrender charge does not apply to:
●
A surrender or withdrawal of a Purchase Payment beyond the ninth anniversary since the Purchase Payment was invested;
●
Withdrawals of Contract Value to the extent that the total Contract Value withdrawn during the current Contract Year does not exceed the greater of 10% of the current Contract Value or of the total Purchase Payments (“free amount”). This exception does not apply upon surrender of the Contract;
●
Purchase Payments that have been invested in the Contract for at least twelve months when used in the calculation of the initial benefit payment to be made under an Annuity Payout option, other than the i4LIFE® Advantage option;
●
A surrender or withdrawal of any Purchase Payments, if such Purchase Payments were received by us more than twelve months prior to the onset of a permanent and total disability of the Contractowner as defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the tax code, if the disability occurred after the effective date of the Contract and before the 65th birthday of the Contractowner. For contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, a different definition of permanent and total disability applies;
●
A surviving spouse at the time he or she assumes ownership of the Contract as a result of the death of the original Contractowner (however, the surrender charge schedule for the original Contract will continue to apply to the spouse's Contract);
●
A surrender or withdrawal of any Purchase Payments, if such Purchase Payments were received by us more than twelve months prior to the admittance of the Contractowner into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility, where the admittance into such facility occurs after the effective date of the Contract and the Contractowner has been confined for at least 90 consecutive days;
●
A surrender or withdrawal of any Purchase Payments, if such Purchase Payments were received by us more than twelve months prior to the diagnosis date of a terminal illness that is after the effective date of the Contract and results in a life expectancy of less than one year as determined by a qualified professional medical practitioner;
●
A surrender of the Contract as a result of the death of the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant;
●
A surrender of the Contract or the withdrawal of a Purchase Payment beyond the seventh anniversary since the Purchase Payment was invested for any Contract previously issued to individuals who were members of a selling group. For individuals who were members of a selling group, a reduced schedule of surrender charges applies;
●
A surrender or annuitization of Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits;
●
Purchase Payments when used in the calculation of the initial Account Value under the i4LIFE® Advantage option;
●
Regular Income Payments made under i4LIFE® Advantage including any payments to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit, or periodic payments made under any Annuity Payout option made available by us;
●
Amounts up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount or the Protected Annual Income amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders, subject to certain conditions.
For purposes of calculating the surrender charge on withdrawals, we assume that:
1.
The free amount will be withdrawn from Purchase Payments on a first in-first out (“FIFO”) basis.
2.
Prior to the ninth anniversary of the Contract, any amount withdrawn above the free amount during a Contract Year will be withdrawn in the following order:
●
from Purchase Payments (on a FIFO basis) until exhausted; then
●
from earnings until exhausted; then
●
from Bonus Credits.
3.
On or after the ninth anniversary of the Contract, any amount withdrawn above the free amount during a Contract Year will be withdrawn in the following order:
●
from Purchase Payments (on a FIFO basis) to which a surrender charge no longer applies until exhausted; then
●
from earnings and Persistency Credits until exhausted; then
17
●
from Bonus Credits attributable to Purchase Payments to which a surrender charge no longer applies until exhausted; then
●
from Purchase Payments (on a FIFO basis) to which a surrender charge still applies until exhausted; then
●
from Bonus Credits attributable to Purchase Payments to which a surrender charge still applies.
We apply the surrender charge as a percentage of Purchase Payments, which means that you would pay the same surrender charge at the time of surrender regardless of whether your Contract Value has increased or decreased. The surrender charge is calculated separately for each Purchase Payment. The surrender charges associated with surrender or withdrawal are paid to us to compensate us for the loss we experience on contract distribution costs when Contractowners surrender or withdraw before distribution costs have been recovered.
There are charges associated with surrender of a Contract or withdrawal of Contract Value. You may specify whether these charges are deducted from the amount you request to be withdrawn or from the remaining Contract Value. If the charges are deducted from the remaining Contract Value, the amount of the total withdrawal will increase according to the impact of the applicable surrender charge percentage; consequently, the dollar amount of the surrender charge associated with the withdrawal will also increase. In other words, the dollar amount deducted to cover the surrender charge is also subject to a surrender charge.
If the Contractowner is a corporation or other non-individual (non-natural person), the Annuitant or joint Annuitant will be considered the Contractowner or joint owner for purposes of determining when a surrender charge does not apply.
Administrative Expense (Annual Account Fee)
During the accumulation period, we will deduct an account fee of $35 ($50 for contracts purchased prior to November 15, 2010) from the Contract Value on each contract anniversary to compensate us for the administrative services provided to you; this account fee will also be deducted from the Contract Value upon surrender. The account fee will be waived after the fifteenth Contract Year. The account fee will be waived for any Contract with a Contract Value that is equal to or greater than $100,000 ($50,000 for contracts purchased prior to November 15, 2010) on the contract anniversary (or date of surrender). Older contracts may have a lower fee. The exact fee is listed in your Contract.
Rider Charges
A fee or expense may also be deducted in connection with any benefits added to the Contract by rider or endorsement. The deduction of a rider charge will be noted on your quarterly statement.
A discussion of the charges for closed riders can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.
i4LIFE® Advantage Charge. While this rider is in effect, there is a daily charge for i4LIFE® Advantage that is based on your Account Value. The annual i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate is 0.40% and is added to your base contract expense.
The initial Account Value is your Contract Value on the Valuation Date i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or your initial Purchase Payment and Bonus Credit if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, your Account Value equals the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, and will be reduced by Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and any withdrawals.
If i4LIFE® Advantage is elected at the issue of the Contract i4LIFE® Advantage and the charge will begin on the Contract's effective date. Otherwise, i4LIFE® Advantage and the charge will begin on the Periodic Income Commencement Date which is the Valuation Date on which the Regular Income Payment is determined and the beginning of the Access Period. Refer to the i4LIFE® Advantage section for explanations of the Account Value, the Access Period, the Lifetime Income Period, and the Periodic Income Commencement Date.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge. The current annual charge rates for new elections of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, are disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement.
The Rate Sheet indicates current rates and the date by which your rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time in our sole discretion and may be higher or lower than the charge rate on the previous Rate Sheet. Rate information for previous effective periods are included in the Fee Table and in an Appendix to this prospectus.
Any change to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit fee rate will be disclosed in a new Rate Sheet at least ten days before a rate becomes effective. Current Rate Sheets, will be included with the prospectus. You can obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate is based on your Account Value and is added to the i4LIFE® Advantage Charge rate.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge rate may change upon an automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit or you elect an additional step-up period (version 2 and version 3) (described later in the i4LIFE® Advantage section of this prospectus). At the time of the step-up, the Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed) up to the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate. See Fee Tables.
18
If we automatically administer the step-up for Select Guaranteed Income Benefit and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) or step-up period election (version 2 and version 3) for you and your charge rate is increased, you may ask us to reverse the step-up or the step-up period election by giving us notice within 30 days after the date on which the step-up or the step-up period election occurred. If we receive notice of your request to reverse the step-up, on a going forward basis, we will decrease the charge rate to the charge rate in effect before the step-up or the step-up period election occurred. Any increased charges paid between the time of the step-up and the date we receive your notice to reverse the step-up will not be reimbursed. For Select Guaranteed Income Benefit and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4), future step-ups will continue even after you decline a current step-up. We will provide you with written notice when a step-up has resulted in an increase to the current charge rate so that you may give us timely notice if you wish to reverse a step-up. Version 1 does not step-up; therefore the charge does not change.
After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, the Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge will also terminate, but the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will continue.
Deductions for Premium Taxes
Any premium tax or other tax levied by any governmental entity as a result of the existence of the contracts or the VAA will be deducted from the Contract Value, unless the governmental entity dictates otherwise, when incurred, or at another time of our choosing.
The applicable premium tax rates that states and other governmental entities impose on the purchase of an annuity are subject to change by legislation, by administrative interpretation or by judicial action. These premium tax rates generally depend upon the law of your state of residence. The tax rates range from zero to 5%.
Other Charges and Deductions
The surrender, withdrawal or transfer of value from a fixed account Guaranteed Period may be subject to the Interest Adjustment. See Fixed Side of the Contract.
Base contract expenses of 1.40% of the value in the VAA will be assessed on all variable Annuity Payouts, including options that may be offered that do not have a life contingency and therefore no mortality risk. This charge includes the mortality and expense risk and administrative charge. The expense risk is the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges.
There are additional deductions from and expenses paid out of the assets of the underlying funds that are more fully described in the prospectuses for the funds. Among these deductions and expenses are 12b-1 fees which reimburse us or an affiliate for certain expenses incurred in connection with certain administrative and distribution support services provided to the funds.
Additional Information
The charges described previously may be reduced or eliminated for any particular contract or an additional Bonus Credit may be paid. However, these reductions or benefits may be available only to the extent that we anticipate lower distribution and/or administrative expenses, or that we perform fewer sales or administrative services than those originally contemplated in establishing the level of those charges, or when required by law. Lower distribution and administrative expenses may be the result of economies associated with:
●
the use of mass enrollment procedures,
●
the performance of administrative or sales functions by the employer,
●
the use by an employer of automated techniques in submitting deposits or information related to deposits on behalf of its employees, or
●
any other circumstances which reduce distribution or administrative expenses.
The exact amount of charges and fees or Bonus Credit applicable to a particular contract will be stated in that contract.
The Contracts
Purchase of Contracts
If you wish to purchase a Contract, you must apply for it through a registered representative authorized by us. Certain broker-dealers may not offer all of the features discussed in this prospectus. The completed application is sent to us and we decide whether to accept or reject it. If the application is accepted, a Contract is prepared and executed by our legally authorized officers. The Contract is then sent to you either directly or through your registered representative. See Distribution of the Contracts. The purchase of multiple contracts with identical Contractowners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries will be allowed only upon Home Office approval.
When a completed application and all other information necessary for processing a purchase order is received in Good Order at our Home Office, an initial Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit will be priced no later than two business days after we
19
receive the order. If you submit your application and/or initial Purchase Payment to your registered representative, we will not begin processing your purchase order until we receive the application and initial Purchase Payment from your registered representative’s broker-dealer. While attempting to finish an incomplete application, we may hold the initial Purchase Payment for no more than five business days unless we receive your consent to retain the payment until the application is completed. If the incomplete application cannot be completed within those five days and we have not received your consent, you will be informed of the reasons, and the Purchase Payment will be returned immediately. Once the application is complete, we will allocate your initial Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit within two business days.
We offer a variety of variable annuity contracts. The amount of the Bonus Credit may be more than offset by higher surrender charges associated with the Bonus Credit. Similar products that do not offer Bonus Credits and have lower fees and charges may provide large cash surrender values than this Contract, depending on the level of Bonus Credits in this Contract and the performance of the owner's chosen Subaccounts. This Contract is designed for someone with a longer investment time horizon. You should determine the appropriate period of time that you must own the Contract to receive the desired benefit from any Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits. We encourage you to talk to your financial advisor and determine which annuity contract is most appropriate for you.
Who Can Invest
To apply for a Contract, you must be of legal age in a state where the contracts may be lawfully sold and also be eligible to participate in any of the qualified or nonqualified plans for which the contracts are designed. At the time of issue, the Contractowner, joint owner and Annuitant must be under age 86. Certain Death Benefit options may not be available at all ages. Federal law requires all financial institutions to obtain, verify, and record information that identifies each person who opens an account in an effort to help the government fight the funding of terrorism and money laundering activities. When you open an account, we will ask for your name, address, date of birth, and other information that will allow us to identify you. We may also ask to see your driver's license, photo i.d., or other identifying documents.
In accordance with anti-money laundering laws and federal economic sanction policy, the Company may be required in a given instance to reject a Purchase Payment and/or freeze a Contractowner’s account. This means we could refuse to honor requests for transfers, withdrawals, surrenders or Death Benefits. Once frozen, monies would be moved from the VAA and fixed account, if any, to an interest-bearing account maintained solely for the Contractowner, and held in that account until instructions are received from the appropriate regulator.
Do not purchase this Contract if you plan to use it, or any of its riders, for speculation, arbitrage, viatical arrangement, or other similar investment scheme. The Contract may not be resold, traded on any stock exchange, or sold on any secondary market.
If you are purchasing the Contract through a tax-favored arrangement, including traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs, you should consider carefully the costs and benefits of the Contract (including annuity income benefits) before purchasing the Contract, since the tax-favored arrangement itself provides tax-deferred growth.
Replacement of Existing Insurance
Careful consideration should be given prior to surrendering or withdrawing money from an existing insurance contract to purchase a Contract described in this prospectus. Surrender charges may be imposed on your existing contract and/or a new surrender charge period may be imposed with the purchase of, or transfer into, this Contract. The benefits offered under this Contract may be less favorable or more favorable than the benefits offered under your current contract. It also may have different charges. You should also consult with your registered representative and/or your tax advisor prior to making an exchange. Cash surrenders from an existing contract may be subject to tax and tax penalties.
Purchase Payments
You may make Purchase Payments to the Contract at any time, prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option, subject to certain conditions. You are not required to make any additional Purchase Payments after the initial Purchase Payment. The minimum initial Purchase Payment is $10,000 ($25,000 for contracts purchased prior to November 15, 2010). The minimum annual amount for additional Purchase Payments is $300. Please check with your registered representative about making additional Purchase Payments since the requirements of your state may vary. The minimum payment to the Contract at any one time must be at least $100 ($25 if transmitted electronically). If a Purchase Payment is submitted that does not meet the minimum amount, we will contact you to ask whether additional money will be sent, or whether we should return the Purchase Payment to you.
Purchase Payments totaling $2 million or more are subject to Home Office approval. This amount takes into consideration the total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity contracts issued by the Company (or its affiliates) (excluding any version of Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level Advantage 2® contracts) for the same Contractowner, joint owner, and/or Annuitant.
Beginning May 19, 2025, Purchase Payments totaling $5 million or more are subject to Home Office approval ($2 million or more where a Living Benefit Rider or Death Benefit rider was elected excluding the Account Value Death Benefit and/or i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit). Both amounts take into consideration the total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity
20
contracts issued by the Company (or its affiliates) (excluding all Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level Advantage 2® contracts) for the same Contractowner, joint owner, and/or Annuitant.
If you elect a Living Benefit Rider, you may be subject to further restrictions in terms of your ability to make additional Purchase Payments, as more fully described below. If you stop making Purchase Payments, the Contract will remain in force, however, we may terminate the Contract as allowed by your state's non-forfeiture law for individual deferred annuities. We will not surrender your Contract if you are receiving guaranteed payments from us under one of the Living Benefit Riders. Purchase Payments may be made or, if stopped, resumed at any time until the selection of an Annuity Payout option, the surrender of the Contract, or the death of the Contractowner, whichever comes first.
After the first anniversary of a Living Benefit Rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed:
●
at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date if you elect any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit; or
●
at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date if you elect i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit on a nonqualified contract
In addition to the specific Purchase Payment restrictions and limitations immediately above, upon advance written notice, we reserve the right to further limit, restrict, or suspend Purchase Payments made to the Contract. State variations may also apply.
These restrictions and limitations will limit your ability to increase your Contract Value (or Account Value under i4LIFE® Advantage with any version of Guaranteed Income Benefit) and/or increase the amount of any guaranteed benefit under a Living Benefit Rider by making additional Purchase Payments to the Contract. You should carefully consider these limitations and restrictions, and any other limitations and restrictions of the Contract, and how they may impact your long-term investment plans, especially if you intend to increase Contract Value (or Account Value under any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit) by making additional Purchase Payments over a long period of time. Please contact your registered representative and refer to the Living Benefit Riders section of this prospectus for additional information on any restrictions that may apply to your Living Benefit Rider. State variations may apply.
Bonus Credits
In some states, the term bonus credit may be referred to as value enhancement or a similar term in the Contract.
For each Purchase Payment made into the Contract, we will credit the Contract with a Bonus Credit. The amount of the Bonus Credit will be added to the value of the Contract at the same time and allocated in the same percentage as the Purchase Payment. The amount of the Bonus Credit is calculated as a percentage of the Purchase Payment made. The amount of any Bonus Credit applied to the Contract will be noted on the confirmation sent after each Purchase Payment. The Bonus Credit percentage is based on the owner’s investment at the time each Purchase Payment is made according to the following table: 
Owner's Investment
Bonus Credit %
Less than $100,000
3.0
%
$100,000–$999,999
4.0
%
$1,000,000 or greater
5.0
%
The owner's investment is defined as the sum of:
1.
the current Contract Values (including the Contract Values of the Contract into which the Purchase Payment is being added) as of the most recent Valuation Date prior to the date the Purchase Payment is submitted to us for any of the individual Lincoln Life nonqualified American Legacy annuity contracts owned by you, your spouse, and any of your children under the age 21 as well as any other individual Lincoln Life contracts that may be made available by us in the future for this purpose; plus
2.
the amount (in dollars) of an investment owned by you, your spouse, and any of your children under the age 21 in existing nonqualified mutual funds in the American Funds Group (The American Funds Group consists of mutual funds also managed by CRMC.); plus
3.
the amount of the current Purchase Payment you are making into the Contract.
If you, your spouse, or any of your children under the age of 21 are the named Annuitant under any Contract under (1) above and the owner is a non-natural owner (for example: a corporation or a trust), then you may include these Account Values in the calculation of the owner's investment for nonqualified contracts.
At the time you make a Purchase Payment you are responsible for providing us with the current Contract Values of the individual Lincoln Life nonqualified variable annuities and the dollar amount of the nonqualified mutual funds in the American Funds Group that you, your spouse or your children under the age of 21 own in order to be included in the calculation of the owner's investment. You or
21
your broker dealer representative may ascertain the current Contract Values for those contracts or dollar amount invested in mutual funds through the telephone, internet or other electronic means. You or your broker dealer representative may then indicate the amount of current Contract Values or amounts invested in mutual funds when submitting the Purchase Payment to us. If upon review of the current Contract Values or amounts of mutual funds invested provided to us we determine that the amounts are inaccurate we will contact you and request that you provide us written documentation to substantiate the amount of the Contract Values or amounts of mutual funds invested provided by you or your broker dealer representative. We reserve the right to add or remove annuity contracts as being eligible to be included in the owner's investment as our business needs may dictate. If we make a change to the eligible annuity contracts or mutual funds listing we will notify you no more than annually by updating the prospectus.
Tax qualified annuity contracts (including IRAs) cannot be used when determining the amount of the owner's investment. Inclusion of qualified contracts could result in loss of the tax qualified status or tax penalties. It is your responsibility to provide us with Contract Values for only nonqualified contracts.
During the first Contract Year if you make any Purchase Payment(s) after the initial Purchase Payment (“subsequent Purchase Payment”), we may add a Bonus Credit (“additional Bonus Credit”) to the Contract that is in addition to any Bonus Credit that was previously added to the Contract and the Bonus Credit that is added due to the subsequent Purchase Payment. The additional Bonus Credit will be added to the Contract if the subsequent Purchase Payment increases the owner's investment to a dollar level that qualifies for a higher Bonus Credit percentage than the Bonus Credit percentage that any prior Purchase Payments qualified for. The additional Bonus Credit will be added to your Contract at the time the subsequent Purchase Payment is made. The Bonus Credit percentage for the additional Bonus Credit will be the difference between the higher Bonus Credit percentage that the subsequent Purchase Payment qualifies for and the Bonus Credit percentage that the prior Purchase Payments qualified for. We will then multiply the sum of all prior first year Purchase Payments by this Bonus Credit percentage to determine the amount of the additional Bonus Credit. You may receive more than one additional Bonus Credit during the first Contract Year as we will add an additional Bonus Credit anytime a subsequent Purchase Payment increases the amount of the total Purchase Payments to an amount that qualifies for a higher Bonus Credit percentage.
Persistency Credits
Contractowners will receive a Persistency Credit on a quarterly basis after the fourteenth contract anniversary. Persistency Credits are designed to fully or partially offset additional charges associated with the Bonus Credit. The amount of the Persistency Credit is calculated by multiplying the Contract Value, less any Purchase Payments that have not been invested in the Contract for at least fourteen years, by 0.0625% (or 0.05% on contracts issued before June 6, 2005 or later in some states). This Persistency Credit will be allocated to the variable Subaccounts and the DCA fixed account, if available, in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount and fixed Subaccount at the time the Persistency Credit is paid into the Contract.
There is no additional charge to receive this Persistency Credit, and in no case will the Persistency Credit be less than zero. The amount of any Persistency Credit received will be noted on your quarterly statement.
Valuation Date
Accumulation and Annuity Units will be valued once daily at the close of trading (normally, 4:00 p.m., New York time) on each day the New York Stock Exchange is open (Valuation Date). On any date other than a Valuation Date, the Accumulation Unit value and the Annuity Unit value will not change.
Allocation of Purchase Payments
Purchase Payments allocated to the variable side of the contract are placed into the VAA’s Subaccounts, according to your instructions. You may also allocate Purchase Payments to the fixed account, if available. Corresponding Bonus Credits will be allocated to the Subaccount(s) and/or the fixed side of the contract in the same proportion in which you allocate Purchase Payments. In the absence of instructions accompanying a Purchase Payment or otherwise not being in Good Order, we will allocate a Purchase Payment in the same manner as your last Purchase Payment or, if not possible, contact you or your registered representative for additional information.
The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment which can be put into any one Subaccount is $20. The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment which can be put into a fixed account is $2,000, ($300 for contracts issued prior to June 2, 2003), subject to state approval.
Purchase Payments received from you or your broker-dealer in Good Order at our Home Office prior to the close of the New York Stock Exchange (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time), will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date. Purchase Payments received in Good Order after market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. Purchase Payments submitted to your registered representative will generally not be processed by us until they are received from your registered representative’s broker-dealer. If your broker-dealer submits your Purchase Payment to us through the Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation (DTCC) or, pursuant to terms agreeable to us, uses a proprietary order placement system to submit your Purchase Payment to us, and your Purchase Payment was placed with your broker-dealer prior to
22
market close, then we will use the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date when processing your Purchase Payment. Purchase Payments placed with your broker-dealer after market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. There may be circumstances under which the New York Stock Exchange may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances, Purchase Payments received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.
The number of Accumulation Units determined in this way is not impacted by any subsequent change in the value of an Accumulation Unit. However, the dollar value of an Accumulation Unit will vary depending not only upon how well the underlying fund’s investments perform, but also upon the expenses of the VAA and the underlying funds.
If an underlying fund imposes restrictions with respect to the acceptance of Purchase Payments, allocations or transfers, we reserve the right to reject an allocation or transfer request at any time the underlying fund notifies us of such a restriction. We will notify you if your allocation request is or becomes subject to such restrictions.
Valuation of Accumulation Units
Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits allocated to the VAA are converted into Accumulation Units. This is done by dividing the amount allocated by the value of an Accumulation Unit for the Valuation Period during which the Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits are allocated to the VAA. The Accumulation Unit value for each Subaccount was or will be established at the inception of the Subaccount. It may increase or decrease from Valuation Period to Valuation Period. Accumulation Unit values are affected by investment performance of the funds, fund expenses, and the contract charges. The Accumulation Unit value for a Subaccount for a later Valuation Period is determined as follows:
1.
The total value of the fund shares held in the Subaccount is calculated by multiplying the number of fund shares owned by the Subaccount at the beginning of the Valuation Period by the net asset value per share of the fund at the end of the Valuation Period, and adding any dividend or other distribution of the fund if an ex-dividend date occurs during the Valuation Period; minus
2.
The liabilities of the Subaccount at the end of the Valuation Period; these liabilities include daily charges imposed on the Subaccount, and may include a charge or credit with respect to any taxes paid or reserved for by us that we determine result from the operations of the VAA; and
3.
The result is divided by the number of Subaccount units outstanding at the beginning of the Valuation Period.
The daily charges imposed on a Subaccount for any Valuation Period are equal to the daily base contract expense multiplied by the number of calendar days in the Valuation Period. Contracts with different features have different daily charges, and therefore, will have different corresponding Accumulation Unit values on any given day. In certain circumstances (for example, when separate account assets are less than $1,000), and when permitted by law, it may be prudent for us to use a different standard industry method for this calculation, called the Net Investment Factor method. We will achieve substantially the same result using either method.
Transfers On or Before the Selection of an Annuity Payout Option
After the first 30 days from the effective date of your Contract, you may transfer all or a portion of your investment from one Subaccount to another. A transfer among Subaccounts involves the surrender of Accumulation Units in one Subaccount and the purchase of Accumulation Units in the other Subaccount. A transfer will be done using the respective Accumulation Unit values determined at the end of the Valuation Date on which the transfer request is received.
Transfers (among the Subaccounts and as permitted between the variable and fixed accounts) are limited to 12 per Contract Year unless otherwise authorized by us. This limit does not apply to transfers made under the automatic transfer programs of dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment or portfolio rebalancing. See Additional Services and the SAI for more information on these programs. These transfer rights and restrictions also apply during the i4LIFE® Advantage Access Period (the time period during which you may make withdrawals from the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value). See i4LIFE® Advantage.
The minimum amount which may be transferred between Subaccounts is $300 (or the entire amount in the Subaccount, if less than $300). If the transfer from a Subaccount would leave you with less than $300 in the Subaccount, we may transfer the total balance of the Subaccount.
A transfer request may be made to our Home Office in writing or by fax. A transfer request may also be made by telephone or other electronic means, provided the appropriate authorization is on file with us. Our address, telephone number, and Internet address are on the first page of this prospectus. Requests for transfers will be processed on the Valuation Date that they are received when they are received in Good Order at our Home Office before the close of the New York Stock Exchange (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time). If we receive a transfer request in Good Order after market close, we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.
There may be circumstances under which the New York Stock Exchange may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances transfers received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.
23
We may defer or reject a transfer request that is subject to a restriction imposed by an underlying fund.
After the first 30 days from the effective date of your Contract, if your Contract offers a fixed account, you may also transfer all or any part of the Contract Value from the Subaccount(s) to the fixed side of the contract, except during periods when (if permitted by your Contract) we have discontinued accepting transfers into the fixed side of the contract. The minimum amount which can be transferred to a fixed account is $2,000 or the total amount in the Subaccount if less than $2,000. However, if a transfer from a Subaccount would leave you with less than $300 in the Subaccount, we may transfer the total amount to the fixed side of the contract.
You may also transfer part of the Contract Value from a fixed account to the Subaccount(s) subject to the following restrictions:
●
total fixed account transfers are limited to 25% of the value of that fixed account in any 12-month period; and
●
the minimum amount that can be transferred is $300 or, if less, the amount in the fixed account.
Because of these restrictions, it may take several years to transfer all of the Contract Value in the fixed accounts to the Subaccounts. You should carefully consider whether the fixed account meets your investment criteria. Transfers of all or a portion of a fixed account (other than automatic transfer programs and i4LIFE® Advantage transfers) may be subject to Interest Adjustments, if applicable. For a description of the Interest Adjustment, see the Fixed Side of the Contract - Guaranteed Periods and Interest Adjustment.
Transfers may be delayed as permitted by the 1940 Act. See Delay of Payments.
Telephone and Electronic Transactions
A surrender, withdrawal, or transfer request may be made to our Home Office in writing or by fax. These transactions may also be made by telephone or other electronic means, provided the appropriate authorization is on file with us. In order to prevent unauthorized or fraudulent transfers, we may require certain identifying information before we will act upon instructions. We may also assign the Contractowner a Personal Identification Number (PIN) to serve as identification. We will not be liable for following instructions we reasonably believe are genuine. Telephone and other electronic requests will be recorded and written confirmation of all transactions will be mailed or sent electronically to the Contractowner on the next Valuation Date.
Please note that the telephone and/or electronic devices may not always be available. Any telephone, fax machine, or other electronic device, whether it is yours, your service provider’s, or your registered representative’s, can experience outages or slowdowns for a variety of reasons. These outages or slowdowns may delay or prevent our processing of your request. Although we have taken precautions to limit these problems, we cannot promise complete reliability under all circumstances. If you are experiencing problems, you should make your request by writing to our Home Office.
Market Timing
Frequent, large, or short-term transfers among Subaccounts and the fixed account, such as those associated with “market timing” transactions, can affect the funds and their investment returns. Such transfers may dilute the value of the fund shares, interfere with the efficient management of the fund's portfolio, and increase brokerage and administrative costs of the funds. As an effort to protect our Contractowners and the funds from potentially harmful trading activity, we utilize certain market timing policies and procedures (the “Market Timing Procedures”). Our Market Timing Procedures are designed to detect and prevent such transfer activity among the Subaccounts and the fixed account that may affect other Contractowners or fund shareholders.
In addition, the funds may have adopted their own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemptions of their respective shares. The prospectuses for the funds describe any such policies and procedures, which may be more or less restrictive than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other funds and the Market Timing Procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent transfers among Subaccounts. While we reserve the right to enforce these policies and procedures, Contractowners and other persons with interests under the Contract should be aware that we may not have the contractual authority or the operational capacity to apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the funds. However, under SEC rules, we are required to: (1) enter into a written agreement with each fund or its principal underwriter that obligates us to provide to the fund promptly upon request certain information about the trading activity of individual Contractowners, and (2) execute instructions from the fund to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by specific Contractowners who violate the excessive trading policies established by the fund.
You should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the funds generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as retirement plans or separate accounts funding variable insurance contracts. The omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and/or individual owners of variable insurance contracts. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the funds’ ability to apply their respective disruptive trading policies and procedures. We cannot guarantee that the funds (and thus our Contractowners) will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans and/or other insurance companies that may invest in the funds. In addition, if a fund believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more transfer requests from Contractowners engaged in disruptive trading activity, the fund may reject the entire omnibus order.
Our Market Timing Procedures detect potential “market timers” by examining the number of transfers made by Contractowners within given periods of time. In addition, managers of the funds might contact us if they believe or suspect that there is market timing. If
24
requested by a fund company, we may vary our Market Timing Procedures from Subaccount to Subaccount to comply with specific fund policies and procedures.
We may increase our monitoring of Contractowners who we have previously identified as market timers. When applying the parameters used to detect market timers, we will consider multiple contracts owned by the same Contractowner if that Contractowner has been identified as a market timer. For each Contractowner, we will investigate the transfer patterns that meet the parameters being used to detect potential market timers. We will also investigate any patterns of trading behavior identified by the funds that may not have been captured by our Market Timing Procedures.
Once a Contractowner has been identified as a market timer under our Market Timing Procedures, we will notify the Contractowner in writing that future transfers (among the Subaccounts and/or the fixed account) will be temporarily permitted to be made only by original signature sent to us by U.S. mail, first-class delivery for the remainder of the Contract Year (or calendar year if the Contract is an individual contract that was sold in connection with an employer sponsored plan). Overnight delivery or electronic instructions (which may include telephone, facsimile, or Internet instructions) submitted during this period will not be accepted. If overnight delivery or electronic instructions are inadvertently accepted from a Contractowner that has been identified as a market timer, upon discovery, we will reverse the transaction within 1 or 2 business days. We will impose this “original signature” restriction on that Contractowner even if we cannot identify, in the particular circumstances, any harmful effect from that Contractowner's particular transfers.
Contractowners seeking to engage in frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity may deploy a variety of strategies to avoid detection. Our ability to detect such transfer activity may be limited by operational systems and technological limitations. The identification of Contractowners determined to be engaged in such transfer activity that may adversely affect other Contractowners or fund shareholders involves judgments that are inherently subjective. We cannot guarantee that our Market Timing Procedures will detect every potential market timer. If we are unable to detect market timers, you may experience dilution in the value of your fund shares and increased brokerage and administrative costs in the funds. This may result in lower long-term returns for your investments.
Our Market Timing Procedures are applied consistently to all Contractowners. An exception for any Contractowner will be made only in the event we are required to do so by a court of law. In addition, certain funds available as investment options in your Contract may also be available as investment options for owners of other, older life insurance policies issued by us. Some of these older life insurance policies do not provide a contractual basis for us to restrict or refuse transfers which are suspected to be market timing activity. In addition, because other insurance companies and/or retirement plans may invest in the funds, we cannot guarantee that the funds will not suffer harm from frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity among Subaccounts and the fixed accounts of variable contracts issued by other insurance companies or among investment options available to retirement plan participants.
In our sole discretion, we may revise our Market Timing Procedures at any time without prior notice as necessary to better detect and deter frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, and/or to impose additional or alternate restrictions on market timers (such as dollar or percentage limits on transfers). If we modify our Market Timing Procedures, they will be applied uniformly to all Contractowners or as applicable to all Contractowners investing in underlying funds.
Some of the funds have reserved the right to temporarily or permanently refuse payments or transfer requests from us if, in the judgment of the fund’s investment adviser, the fund would be unable to invest effectively in accordance with its investment objective or policies, or would otherwise potentially be adversely affected. To the extent permitted by applicable law, we reserve the right to defer or reject a transfer request at any time that we are unable to purchase or redeem shares of any of the funds available through the VAA, including any refusal or restriction on purchases or redemptions of the fund shares as a result of the funds' own policies and procedures on market timing activities. If a fund refuses to accept a transfer request we have already processed, we will reverse the transaction within 1 or 2 business days. We will notify you in writing if we have reversed, restricted or refused any of your transfer requests. Some funds also may impose redemption fees on short-term trading (i.e., redemptions of mutual fund shares within a certain number of business days after purchase). We reserve the right to administer and collect any such redemption fees on behalf of the funds. You should read the funds’ prospectuses for more details on their redemption fees and their ability to refuse or restrict purchases or redemptions of their shares.
Transfers After the Selection of an Annuity Payout Option
You may transfer all or a portion of your investment in one Subaccount to another Subaccount or to the fixed side of the contract, as permitted under your Contract. Those transfers will be limited to three times per Contract Year. You may also switch from a variable Annuity Payout to a fixed Annuity Payout. You may not switch from a fixed Annuity Payout to a variable Annuity Payout. Once elected, the fixed Annuity Payout is irrevocable.
These provisions also apply during the i4LIFE® Advantage Lifetime Income Period. See i4LIFE® Advantage.
Ownership
The Contractowner on the date of issue will be the person or entity designated in the contract specifications. The Contractowner of a nonqualified contract may name a joint owner.
25
As Contractowner, you have all rights under the Contract. According to Indiana law, the assets of the VAA are held for the exclusive benefit of all Contractowners and their designated Beneficiaries; and the assets of the VAA are not chargeable with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct. We reserve the right to approve all ownership and Annuitant changes. Nonqualified contracts may not be sold, discounted, or pledged as collateral for a loan or for any other purpose. Qualified contracts are not transferable unless allowed under applicable law. Nonqualified contracts may not be collaterally assigned. Assignments may have an adverse impact on any Death Benefits or benefits offered under Living Benefit Riders in this product and may be prohibited under the terms of a particular feature. We assume no responsibility for the validity or effect of any assignment. Consult your tax advisor about the tax consequences of an assignment.
Joint Ownership
If a Contract has joint owners, the joint owners shall be treated as having equal undivided interests in the Contract. Either owner, independently of the other, may exercise any ownership rights in this Contract. Not more than two owners (an owner and joint owner) may be named and contingent owners are not permitted.
Annuitant
The following rules apply prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option. You may name only one Annuitant (unless you are a tax-exempt entity, then you can name two joint Annuitants). You (if the Contractowner is a natural person) have the right to change the Annuitant at any time by notifying us in writing of the change. However, we reserve the right to approve all Annuitant changes. This may not be allowed if certain riders are in effect. The new Annuitant must be under age 86 as of the effective date of the change. This change may cause a reduction in the Death Benefits or benefits offered under Living Benefit Riders. See Benefits Available Under the Contract – Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders. A contingent Annuitant may be named or changed by notifying us in writing. Contingent Annuitants are not allowed on contracts owned by non-natural owners. On or after the selection of an Annuity Payout option, the Annuitant or joint Annuitants may not be changed and contingent Annuitant designations are no longer applicable.
Surrenders and Withdrawals
Before the selection of an Annuity Payout option, we will allow the surrender of the Contract or a withdrawal of the Contract Value upon your written request on an approved Lincoln distribution request form (available from the Home Office), by fax, or other electronic means. Withdrawal requests may be made by telephone or our website, subject to certain restrictions. All surrenders and withdrawals may be made in accordance with the rules discussed below. Surrender or withdrawal rights after the selection of an Annuity Payout option depend on the Annuity Payout option selected.
The amount available upon surrender/withdrawal is the Contract Value less any applicable charges, fees, and taxes at the end of the Valuation Period during which the written request for surrender/withdrawal is received in Good Order at the Home Office. If we receive a surrender or withdrawal request in Good Order at our Home Office before the close of the NYSE (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time), we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date. If we receive a surrender or withdrawal request in Good Order at our Home Office after market close, we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. There may be circumstances under which the NYSE may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances, surrender or withdrawal requests received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. The minimum amount which can be withdrawn is $300. Unless a request for withdrawal specifies otherwise, withdrawals will be made from all Subaccounts within the VAA and from the fixed account in the same proportion that the amount of withdrawal bears to the total Contract Value. Surrenders and withdrawals from the fixed account may be subject to the Interest Adjustment. See Fixed Side of the Contract. Unless prohibited, surrender/withdrawal payments will be mailed within seven days after we receive a valid written request at the Home Office. The payment may be postponed as permitted by the 1940 Act.
There are charges associated with surrender of a Contract or withdrawal of Contract Value. You may specify whether these charges are deducted from the amount you request to be withdrawn or from the remaining Contract Value. If the charges are deducted from the remaining Contract Value, the amount of the total withdrawal will increase according to the impact of the applicable surrender charge percentage; consequently, the dollar amount of the surrender charge associated with the withdrawal will also increase. In other words, the dollar amount deducted to cover the surrender charge is also subject to a surrender charge.
Surrenders and withdrawals may be taxable and, prior to age 59½, subject to a tax penalty. The tax consequences of a surrender/withdrawal are discussed later in this prospectus. See Federal Tax Matters – Taxation of Withdrawals and Surrenders.
If the Contract Value is greater than zero, withdrawals are taken from the Contractowner’s own money and may have a negative impact on certain optional living benefits and on certain death benefits, and the impact could be significant. A withdrawal may reduce or even terminate certain benefits.
In addition to surrender charges, withdrawals from the fixed account may be subject to an Interest Adjustment, which could have a significant negative impact.
26
Asset Allocation Models
You may allocate your Purchase Payment among a group of Subaccounts within an asset allocation model. Each model invests different percentages of the Contract Value in some or all of the Subaccounts currently available within your annuity contract. If you select an asset allocation model, 100% of your Contract Value (and any additional Purchase Payments you make) will be allocated among certain Subaccounts in accordance with the model’s asset allocation strategy. You may not make transfers among the Subaccounts. We will proportionately deduct any withdrawals you make from the Subaccounts in the asset allocation model. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model at any time.
Your registered representative may discuss asset allocation models with you to assist in deciding to allocate your Purchase Payments among the various Subaccounts and/or the fixed account, if available. You should consult with your registered representative as to whether a model is appropriate for you.
Each of the asset allocation models seeks to meet its investment objective while avoiding excessive risk. The models also strive to achieve diversification among asset classes in order to help provide returns commensurate with a given level of risk over the long-term. There can be no assurance, however, that any of the asset allocation models will achieve its investment objective. If you are seeking a more aggressive strategy, these models may not be appropriate for you.
The asset allocation models are intended to provide a diversified investment portfolio by combining different asset classes to help it reach its stated investment goal. While diversification may help reduce overall risk, it does not eliminate the risk of loss and it does not protect against loss in a declining market.
In order to maintain the model’s specified Subaccount allocation percentages, you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option and you thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a quarterly basis based upon your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. We reserve the right to change the rebalancing frequency at any time, in our sole discretion, but will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change in frequency.
The models are static asset allocation models. This means that they have fixed allocations made up of underlying funds that are offered within your Contract and the percentage allocations will not change over time. Once you have selected an asset allocation model, we will not make any changes to the fund allocations within the model except for the rebalancing described above. If you wish to change your fund allocations either to new funds or to a different model, you must submit new allocation instructions to us. You may terminate a model at any time. There is no additional charge from Lincoln for participating in a model.
The election of certain Living Benefit Riders may require that you allocate Purchase Payments in accordance with Investment Requirements that may be satisfied by choosing an asset allocation model. Different requirements and/or restrictions may apply under the individual rider. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements. To the extent you are using a model to satisfy your Investment Requirements, the model is intended, in part, to reduce the risk of investment loss that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under the Living Benefit Riders.
The models were designed and prepared by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation (LFIC), which is an affiliate of ours, for use by Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (LFD), the principal underwriter of the contracts. LFD provides models to broker-dealers who may offer the models to their own clients. In making these models and Subaccounts available as investment options under your Contract, LFIC, LFD and the Company are not providing you with investment advice, nor are they recommending to you any particular model or Subaccount. You should consult with your registered representative to determine whether you should utilize or invest in any model or Subaccount, or whether it is suitable for you based upon your goals, risk tolerance, and time horizon.
If a fund within a model closes to new investors, investors that have been invested before the fund closed may remain in the model. However, the model would no longer be offered to new investors. If a fund within a model liquidates, we may transfer assets from that Subaccount to another Subaccount after providing notice to you. If this transfer occurs, and you own a Living Benefit Rider and are subject to Investment Requirements, you may no longer comply with the Investment Requirements. See the Investment Requirements section of this prospectus for more information. If a fund within a model merges with another fund, we will add the surviving fund to the model.
Benefits Available Under the Contract
The following tables summarize information about the benefits available under the Contract. A detailed description of each benefit follows the table. 
27
Standard Benefits
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
Account Value Death
Benefit
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
Contract Value.
●1.50%
●Poor investment performance could
significantly reduce the benefit.
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
Guarantee of Principal
Death Benefit
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all
Purchase Payments, adjusted for
withdrawals.
●1.55%
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
Enhanced Guaranteed
Minimum Death
Benefit (EGMDB)
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all
Purchase Payments, adjusted for
withdrawals; (3) the highest Contract Value
on any contract anniversary prior to age 81
as adjusted for withdrawals.
●1.80%
●Not available if age 80 or older at the
time of issuance.
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
●Poor investment performance could
significantly reduce and limit potential
increases to the highest Contract Value.
Dollar-Cost Averaging
Allows you to automatically transfer
amounts between certain investment
options on a monthly basis.
None
●Minimum amount to be dollar cost
averaged is $1,500 over any time period
between 3 and 60 months.
●Cannot be used simultaneously with
portfolio rebalancing.
Portfolio Rebalancing
Allows you to automatically reallocate your
Contract Value among investment options
on a periodic basis based on your standing
allocation instructions.
None
●Cannot be used simultaneously with
dollar cost averaging.
Cross-Reinvestment
When the amount invested in an investment
option exceeds a baseline amount, allows
you to automatically transfer the excess
amount to another investment option.
None
●Cannot be used simultaneously with
dollar cost averaging or portfolio
rebalancing.
●Not available for new participants.
Automatic Withdrawal
Service
Allows you to take periodic withdrawals
from your Contract automatically.
None
●Automatically terminates once i4LIFE®
Advantage begins.
 
Optional Benefits – Available for Election
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
i4LIFE® Advantage
Provides:
●Variable periodic Regular Income
Payments for life.
●The ability to make additional
withdrawals and surrender the Contract
during the Access Period.
●0.40% in addition to
the base contract
expense for the
Death Benefit you
have elected.
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
●Restrictions apply to the length of the
Access Period.
●Additional Purchase Payments may be
limited.
Guaranteed Income
Benefit
Provides a minimum payout floor for
Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE®
Advantage.
●Select Guaranteed
Income Benefit:
2.75%* (single and
joint life option)
*The Guaranteed
Income Benefit
charge is in addition
to the i4LIFE®
Advantage charge
and your base
contract expense.
●Only available with i4LIFE® Advantage.
●Investment Requirements apply.
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
●Restrictions apply to the length of the
Access Period.
●Additional Purchase Payments may be
limited.
●Availability limited, see the Guaranteed
Income Benefit section below for more
information.
 
28
Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
Estate Enhancement
Benefit Rider
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all
Purchase Payments, adjusted for
withdrawals; (3) the highest Contract Value
on any contract anniversary prior to age 81
(decreased proportionately by subsequent
withdrawals); (4) current Contract Value
plus an amount based on earnings under the
Contract.
●2.00%
●If there are no contract earnings, the
calculations of the Death Benefit using
contract earnings will not be available.
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
Lincoln Lifetime
IncomeSM Advantage
Provides:
●Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals
for you and any joint life regardless of
investment performance.
●Includes step-up and enhancement
features that may result in a higher
guaranteed minimum at certain points in
time.
●1.50%
(as a percentage of
the Protected
Income Base)
●Investment Requirements apply.
●Subject to a $10 million maximum,
which includes the total guaranteed
amounts across all Living Benefit Riders.
●Must be at least age 59 (single life
option) or age 65 (joint life option) to
begin taking guaranteed withdrawals.
●Excess and early withdrawals may
significantly reduce or terminate the
benefit.
●Any withdrawal may negatively impact or
eliminate the potential for enhancements
or step-ups.
●Purchase Payments and step-ups may
increase fee rate.
●Purchase Payments subject to additional
restrictions.
Lincoln
SmartSecurity®
Advantage
Provides:
●A minimum guaranteed amount that you
can withdraw, in installments, from your
Contract. Lifetime periodic withdrawals
may also be available if certain
conditions are met.
●1.50%
(as an annualized
percentage of the
Guaranteed
Amount)
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
●Investment Requirements apply.
●Subject to a $10 million maximum,
which includes the total guaranteed
amounts across all Living Benefit Riders.
●Additional Purchase Payments may be
limited.
●A step-up of the Guaranteed Amount
may increase the fee rate.
4LATER® Advantage
●Establishes a benefit base used to
calculate a guaranteed income benefit
under i4LIFE® Advantage when you are
ready to elect it.
●The benefit base has the potential for
enhancements and resets. Guaranteed
income benefit after election of i4LIFE®
Advantage has a step-up feature that
may result in a higher guaranteed
minimum at certain points in time.
●1.50%
(as a percentage of
the Protected
Income Base)
●Investment Requirements apply.
●Withdrawals may significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
●Any withdrawal may negatively impact or
eliminate the potential for enhancements,
resets, or step-ups.
●Resets may increase current fee rate.
●Purchase Payments subject to additional
restrictions.
29
Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
i4LIFE® Advantage
Guaranteed Income
Benefit
●Provides a minimum payout floor for
Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE®
Advantage.
●Select Guaranteed
Income Benefit
riders elected prior
to 8/19/2024:
2.25%* (single life
option); 2.45%*
(joint life option)
●Guaranteed Income
Benefit (version 4):
2.00%* (single/joint
life option)
●Guaranteed Income
Benefit (versions 1,
2 and 3): 1.50%*
(single/joint life
option)
*The Guaranteed
Income Benefit
charge is in addition
to the i4LIFE®
Advantage charge
and your base
contract expense.
●Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
●Restrictions apply to the length of the
Access Period.
●Additional Purchase Payments can be
subject to restrictions.
●Investment Requirements apply.
1 See Appendix C – Discontinued Living Benefit Riders for a description of the discontinued Living Benefit Riders.
Death Benefits
The chart below provides a brief overview of how the Death Benefit proceeds will be distributed if death occurs prior to i4LIFE® Advantage elections or prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option. Refer to your Contract for the specific provisions applicable upon death. 
upon death of:
and...
and...
Death Benefit proceeds pass to:
Contractowner
There is a surviving joint owner
The Annuitant is living or deceased
Joint owner
Contractowner
There is no surviving joint owner
The Annuitant is living or deceased
Designated Beneficiary
Contractowner
There is no surviving joint owner
and the Beneficiary predeceases the
Contractowner
The Annuitant is living or deceased
Contractowner's estate
Annuitant
The Contractowner is living
There is no contingent Annuitant
The youngest Contractowner
becomes the contingent Annuitant
and the Contract continues. The
Contractowner may waive* this
continuation and receive the Death
Benefit proceeds.
Annuitant
The Contractowner is living
The contingent Annuitant is living
Contingent Annuitant becomes the
Annuitant and the Contract
continues
Annuitant
The Contractowner is a trust or
other non-natural person**
No contingent Annuitant allowed
with non-natural Contractowner
Designated Beneficiary
 
*
Notification from the Contractowner to receive the Death Benefit proceeds must be received within 75 days of the death of the Annuitant.
 
**
Death of Annuitant is treated like death of the Contractowner.
30
A Death Benefit may be payable if the Contractowner (or a joint owner) or Annuitant dies prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option. You can choose the Death Benefit. Only one Death Benefit may be in effect at any one time and this Death Benefit terminates if you elect i4LIFE® Advantage or elect any other annuitization option. Generally, the more expensive the Death Benefit is, the greater the protection.
While utilizing an Automatic Withdrawal Service to satisfy the requirements of the Annuity Commencement Date, the Death Benefit continues until otherwise terminated as noted in the discussion below.
You should consider the following provisions carefully when designating the Beneficiary, Annuitant, any contingent Annuitant and any joint owner, as well as before changing any of these parties. The identity of these parties under the Contract may significantly affect the amount and timing of the Death Benefit or other amount paid upon a Contractowner's or Annuitant's death.
You may designate a Beneficiary during your lifetime and change the Beneficiary by filing a written request with our Home Office. Each change of Beneficiary revokes any previous designation. We reserve the right to request that you send us the Contract for endorsement of a change of Beneficiary.
Upon the death of the Contractowner, a Death Benefit will be paid to the Beneficiary. Upon the death of a joint owner, the Death Benefit will be paid to the surviving joint owner. If the Contractowner is a corporation or other non-individual (non-natural person), the death of the Annuitant will be treated as death of the Contractowner.
If an Annuitant who is not the Contractowner or joint owner dies, then the contingent Annuitant, if named, becomes the Annuitant and no Death Benefit is payable on the death of the Annuitant. If no contingent Annuitant is named, the Contractowner (or younger of joint owners) becomes the Annuitant. Alternatively, a Death Benefit may be paid to the Contractowner (and joint owner, if applicable, in equal shares). Notification of the election of this Death Benefit must be received by us within 75 days of the death of the Annuitant. The Contract terminates when any Death Benefit is paid due to the death of the Annuitant.
If a Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant was added or changed subsequent to the effective date of the Contract (unless the change occurred because of the death of a prior Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant), upon death, we will only pay the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the death claim.
If your Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid.
Account Value Death Benefit. Contractowners who purchased their contracts on or after June 6, 2005 (or later in some states), may select the Account Value Death Benefit. The Account Value Death Benefit provides a Death Benefit equal to the Contract Value on the Valuation Date the Death Benefit is approved by us for payment. No additional Death Benefit is provided. Once you have selected this Death Benefit option, it cannot be changed. (Your Contract may refer to this benefit as the Contract Value Death Benefit.) For example, assume an initial deposit into the Contract of $10,000. The Contract Value increases and equals $12,000 on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved. The amount of Death Benefit paid equals $12,000.
Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit. The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit is the default Death Benefit under this Contact; this means that if you do not select a Death Benefit, the Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit will be automatically selected for you at contract issue. There is an additional charge for this Death Benefit, and it may only be elected when the contract is issued.
The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit provides a Death Benefit equal to the greater of:
●
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
●
the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage.
For example, assume an initial deposit into the Contract of $10,000, and no withdrawals have been taken. The Contract Value decreases and equals $8,000 on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved. Since your principal is guaranteed, the amount of Death Benefit paid equals $10,000.
In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any. For contracts purchased prior to the time a state approved the above Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit calculation, the sum of all Purchase Payments is reduced by the sum of all withdrawals.
For contracts issued on or after June 6, 2005 (or later in those states that have not approved the contract changes), you may discontinue the Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit by completing the Change of Death Benefit form and sending it to our Home Office. The benefit will be discontinued as of the Valuation Date we receive the request and the Account Value Death Benefit will apply. We will begin deducting the charge for the Account Value Death Benefit as of that date. See Charges and Other Deductions.
31
Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB). The EGMDB is available for an additional charge and may only be elected when the Contract is issued.
The EGMDB provides a Death Benefit equal to the greatest of:
●
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
●
the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage; or
●
the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary (including the inception date) (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that contract anniversary) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant and prior to the death of the Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable) or Annuitant for whom a death claim is approved for payment. The highest Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and bonus credits and is decreased by withdrawals subsequent to that anniversary date in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value.
The following example shows how the Death Benefit amount is calculated under the EGMDB: 
7/3/2025 Initial Deposit / Contract Value
$10,000
7/3/2029 Contract Value
$25,000
7/3/2030 Contract Value
$23,500
The EGMDB provides a Death Benefit equal to the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary, so the amount of Death Benefit paid equals $25,000 on the date the death claim is approved.
In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals(surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any. For contracts purchased prior to June 2, 2003 (or later, depending on your state) withdrawals will be deducted on a dollar for dollar basis.
There is an additional charge for this Death Benefit. You may discontinue the EGMDB at any time by completing the Change of Death Benefit form and sending it to our Home Office. The benefit will be discontinued as of the Valuation Date we receive the request, and the Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit will apply, or, if your Contract was purchased on or after June 6, 2005 (or later in those states that have not approved the contract charge), you may also choose the Account Value Death Benefit. We will begin deducting the applicable charge for the new Death Benefit as of that date. See Charges and Other Deductions.
The EGMDB is only available under nonqualified, IRA or Roth IRA contracts if the Contractowner, joint owner and Annuitant are under age 80 at the time of issuance.
Estate Enhancement Benefit Rider (EEB Rider). This Death Benefit is no longer available. The amount of Death Benefit payable under this rider is the greatest of the following amounts:
●
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
●
the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar for dollar basis. See Appendix C – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage; or
●
the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary (including the inception date) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant and prior to the death of the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant for whom a death claim is approved for payment. The highest Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits and is decreased by withdrawals subsequent to that anniversary date in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value; or
●
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim plus an amount equal to the enhancement rate times the lesser of:
●
the contract earnings; or
●
the covered earnings limit.
Note: If there are no contract earnings, there will not be an amount provided under this item.
The following example shows how the Death Benefit amount is calculated under the EEB. It assumes that the oldest Contractowner or Annuitant age is 68, an initial deposit of $100,000 and an enhancement rate of 40%. 
32
Contract Value on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved
$120,000
Contract earnings
$20,000 ($120,000 - $100,000)
Covered earnings limit
$200,000 ($100,000 x 2)
The enhancement rate is multiplied by the lesser of the contract earnings amount ($20,000) or the
covered earnings limit amount ($200,000)
$8,000 (40% x $20,000)
Total Death Benefit amount
$128,000 ($120,000 + $8,000)
The enhancement rate is based on the age of the oldest Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant on the date when the rider becomes effective. If the oldest is under age 70, the rate is 40%. If the oldest is age 70 to 75, the rate is 25%. The EEB rider is not available if the oldest Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant is age 76 or older at the time the rider would become effective.
Contract earnings equal:
●
the Contract Value as of the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved by us for payment; minus
●
the Purchase Payments as of the effective date of this rider; minus
●
each Purchase Payment that is made to the Contract on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment; plus
●
any Purchase Payment that has previously been withdrawn, which is the amount by which each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, exceeded the contract earnings immediately prior to the withdrawal.
The previously withdrawn contractual basis associated with each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider is an amount equal to the greater of $0 and (A), where
(A)
is the amount of the withdrawal minus the greater of $0 and (B); where
(B)
is the result of [(i) - (ii)]; where
(i)
is the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal; and
(ii)
is the amount of Purchase Payments made into the Contract prior to the withdrawal.
The covered earnings limit equals 200% of:
●
the Contract Value as of the effective date of this rider (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that date); plus
●
each Purchase Payment that is made to the Contract on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, and prior to the contract anniversary immediately preceding the 76th birthday of the oldest of the Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable) or Annuitant; minus
●
any contractual basis that has previously been withdrawn, which is the amount by which each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, exceeded the contract earnings immediately prior to the withdrawal.
The previously withdrawn contractual basis associated with each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider is an amount equal to the greater of $0 and (A), where
(A)
is the amount of the withdrawal minus the greater of $0 and (B); where
(B)
is the result of [(i) - (ii)]; where
(i)
is the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal; and
(ii)
is the amount of Purchase Payments made into the Contract prior to the withdrawal.
If the EEB rider is in effect, the enhancement rate for future benefits will be based on the age of the older of the surviving spouse or the Annuitant at the time the EEB is added to the Contract.
The EEB rider may not be terminated unless you surrender the Contract or the Contract is in the Annuity Payout period.
In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any. For contracts purchased prior to June 2, 2003 (or later, depending on your state) withdrawals will be deducted on a dollar for dollar basis.
33
General Death Benefit Information
Only one of these Death Benefit elections may be in effect at any one time. Your Death Benefit terminates on and after the selection of an Annuity Payout option. i4LIFE® Advantage only provides Death Benefit options during the Access Period. There are no Death Benefits during the Lifetime Income Period. Please see the i4LIFE® Advantage – i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits section of this prospectus for more information.
If there are joint owners, upon the death of the first Contractowner, we will pay a Death Benefit to the surviving joint owner. The surviving joint owner will be treated as the primary, designated Beneficiary. Any other Beneficiary designation on record at the time of death will be treated as a contingent Beneficiary. If the surviving joint owner is the spouse of the deceased joint owner, he/she may continue the Contract as sole Contractowner. Upon the death of the spouse who continues the Contract, we will pay a Death Benefit to the designated Beneficiary(s).
If the Beneficiary is the spouse of the Contractowner, then the spouse may elect to continue the Contract as the new Contractowner. All Contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. You are strongly encouraged to consult a tax advisor before electing spousal rights under the Contract.
Should the surviving spouse elect to continue the Contract, a portion of the Death Benefit may be credited to the Contract. Any portion of the Death Benefit that would have been payable (if the Contract had not been continued) that exceeds the current Contract Value on the Valuation Date we approve the claim will be added to the Contract Value. A portion of the Death Benefit credited to the Contract will be allocated to the variable Subaccounts in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount. If the Contract is continued in this way the Death Benefit in effect at the time the Beneficiary elected to continue the Contract will remain as the Death Benefit.
The value of the Death Benefit will be determined as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim. Approval of payment will occur upon our receipt of a claim submitted in Good Order. To be in Good Order, we require all the following:
1.
an original certified death certificate or other proof of death satisfactory to us; and
2.
written authorization for payment; and
3.
all required claim forms, fully completed (including selection of a settlement option).
Notwithstanding any provision of this Contract to the contrary, the payment of Death Benefits provided under this Contract must be made in compliance with Code Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable, as amended from time to time. Death Benefits may be taxable. See Federal Tax Matters.
Unless otherwise provided in the Beneficiary designation, one of the following procedures will take place on the death of a Beneficiary:
●
if any Beneficiary dies before the Contractowner, that Beneficiary’s interest will go to any other Beneficiaries named, according to their respective interests; and/or
●
if no Beneficiary survives the Contractowner, the proceeds will be paid to the Contractowner’s estate.
If the Beneficiary is a minor, court documents appointing the guardian/custodian may be required.
The Beneficiary may choose the method of payment of the Death Benefit unless the Contractowner has already selected a settlement option. If the Contract is a nonqualified contract, the Death Benefit payable to the Beneficiary or joint owner must be distributed within five years of the Contractowner’s date of death unless the Beneficiary begins receiving, within one year of the Contractowner’s death, the distribution in the form of a life annuity or an annuity for a designated period not extending beyond the Beneficiary’s life expectancy. If the Death Benefit is not distributed within five years of the Contractowner’s date of death, for any reason, including the claim was not presented in Good Order, then the Company will pay the proceeds to the Beneficiary.
If the Contract is a qualified contract or IRA, then according to the IRC, the Death Benefit payable to the Beneficiary or joint owner must be distributed within ten years of the Contractowner’s date of death unless the Beneficiary is an “eligible designated beneficiary”. An eligible designated beneficiary may take the Death Benefit distribution in the form of a life annuity or an annuity for a designated period not extending beyond the Beneficiary’s life expectancy, subject to certain additional exceptions. If the Contract is not distributed within the ten-year deadline, for any reason, including that the claim was not presented in Good Order, the balance is treated as a required minimum distribution under the Internal Revenue Code and subject to a 50% tax.
Upon the death of the Annuitant, Federal tax law requires that an annuity election be made no later than 60 days after we have approved the death claim for payment.
The recipient of a Death Benefit may elect to receive payment either in the form of a lump sum settlement or an Annuity Payout. If a lump sum settlement is elected, the proceeds will be mailed within seven days of approval by us of the claim subject to the laws, regulations and tax code governing payment of Death Benefits. This payment may be postponed as permitted by the Investment Company Act of 1940.
34
Abandoned Property. Every state has unclaimed property laws which generally declare annuity contracts to be abandoned after a period of inactivity of three to five years from the date a benefit is due and payable. For example, if the payment of a Death Benefit has been triggered, but, if after a thorough search, we are still unable to locate the Beneficiary of the Death Benefit, or the Beneficiary does not come forward to claim the Death Benefit in a timely manner, the Death Benefit will be “escheated”. This means that the Death Benefit will be paid to the abandoned property division or unclaimed property office of the state in which the Beneficiary or the Contractowner last resided, as shown on our books and records, or to our state of domicile. This escheatment is revocable and the state is obligated to pay the Death Benefit (without interest) if your Beneficiary steps forward to claim it with the proper documentation.
To prevent such escheatment, it is important that you update your Beneficiary designations, including addresses, if and as they change. You may update your Beneficiary designations by submitting a Beneficiary change form to our Home Office.
Additional Services
These additional services are available to you under your Contract: dollar-cost averaging (DCA), automatic withdrawal service (AWS), cross-reinvestment service, and portfolio rebalancing. Currently, there is no charge for these services. However, we reserve the right to impose one after appropriate notice to Contractowners. In order to take advantage of one of these services, you will need to complete the appropriate election form that is available from our Home Office or call 1-800-942-5500. These services will stop once we become aware of a pending death claim. For further detailed information on these services, please see Additional Services in the SAI.
Dollar-Cost Averaging. Dollar-cost averaging allows you to transfer amounts from the DCA fixed account, if available, or certain Subaccounts into the Subaccounts on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available.
You may elect to participate in the DCA program at the time of application or at any time before the selection of an Annuity Payout option by completing our election form, by calling our Home Office, or by other electronic means. The minimum amount to be dollar cost averaged (DCA’d) is $1,500 over any time period between three and 60 months. We may offer different time periods for new Purchase Payments and for transfers of Contract Value. State variations may exist. Once elected, the program will remain in effect until the earlier of:
●
the selection of an Annuity Payout option;
●
the value of the amount being DCA’d is depleted; or
●
you cancel the program by written request or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file.
We reserve the right to limit certain time periods or to restrict access to this program at any time.
A transfer made as part of this program is not considered a transfer for purposes of limiting the number of transfers that may be made, or assessing any charges or Interest Adjustment which may apply to transfers. Upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment allocated to the DCA fixed account, the existing program duration will be extended to reflect the end date of the new DCA program. However, the existing interest crediting rate will not be extended. The existing interest crediting rate will expire at its originally scheduled expiration date and the value remaining in the DCA account from the original amount as well as any additional Purchase Payments will be credited with interest at the standard DCA rate at the time. If you cancel the DCA program, your remaining Contract Value in the DCA program will be allocated to the Subaccounts according to your allocation instructions. We reserve the right to discontinue or modify this program at any time. If you have chosen DCA from one of the Subaccounts, only the amount allocated to that DCA program will be transferred. Investment gain, if any, will remain in that Subaccount unless you reallocate it to one of the other Subaccounts. If you are enrolled in automatic rebalancing, this amount may be automatically rebalanced based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of rebalancing. DCA does not assure a profit or protect against loss.
Automatic Withdrawal Service. The automatic withdrawal service (AWS) provides for an automatic periodic withdrawal of your Contract Value. Withdrawals under AWS are subject to applicable surrender charges and Interest Adjustments. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge and Fixed Side of the Contract – Interest Adjustment. Withdrawals under AWS will be noted on your quarterly statement. AWS is also available for amounts allocated to the fixed account, if applicable.
Cross-Reinvestment Service. The cross-reinvestment service automatically transfers the Contract Value in a designated Subaccount that exceeds a baseline amount to another specific Subaccount at specific intervals. You specify the applicable Subaccounts, the baseline amount and the interval period. As of May 1, 2010, this service is no longer available to new participants. Any Contractowner who had enrolled in this service prior to this date may continue to participate.
Portfolio Rebalancing. Portfolio rebalancing is an option that restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of Contract Value allocated to each Subaccount. The rebalancing may take place monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually. Rebalancing events will be noted on your quarterly statement. The fixed account is not available for portfolio rebalancing.
Only one of the three additional services (DCA, cross-reinvestment and portfolio rebalancing) may be used at one time. For example, you cannot have DCA and cross-reinvestment running simultaneously. We reserve the right to discontinue any or all of these administrative services at any time.
35
Living Benefit Riders
The Living Benefit Riders described in this section provide different methods to take income from your Contract Value or receive lifetime payments and provide certain guarantees, regardless of the investment performance of the Contract. These guarantees are subject to certain conditions, as set forth below. There are differences between the riders in the features provided, income rates, investment options, charge rates, and charge structure. Additionally, the age at which you may begin receiving a benefit from your rider may vary between riders. In addition, the purchase of one rider may impact the availability of another rider. Not all riders will be available at all times. Before you elect a rider, or terminate your existing rider to elect a new rider, you should carefully review the terms and conditions of each rider. Riders elected at contract issue will be effective on the Contract’s effective date. Riders elected after the Contract is issued will be effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us. You cannot elect more than one Living Benefit Rider or payout option offered in your Contract at any one time. Your registered representative will help you determine which Living Benefit Rider best suits your financial goals.
The benefits and features of the optional Living Benefit Riders are separate and distinct from the downside protection strategies that may be employed by the funds offered under the Contract. The riders do not guarantee the investment results of the funds.
There is no guarantee that any Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage) will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time. In addition, we may make different versions of a rider available to new purchasers. Certain broker-dealers may require Contractowners to make post-contract issue rider requests through their registered representative. If your registered representative of record is affiliated with such a broker-dealer we will not process your request until you consult with your registered representative.
Excess Withdrawals under certain Living Benefit Riders may result in a reduction or premature termination of those benefits or of those riders. If you are not certain how an Excess Withdrawal will reduce your future guaranteed amounts, you should contact either your registered representative or us prior to requesting a withdrawal to find out what impact, if any, the Excess Withdrawal will have on any guarantees under the Living Benefit Rider.
If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. In addition, the fixed account is not available except for use with dollar cost averaging. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements and Appendix C – Discontinued Living Benefit Riders for more information.
Rate Sheets
The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages are declared in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the current percentages and the date by which your rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those percentages. The percentages may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the percentages on the previous Rate Sheet.
The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the percentage indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be provided to you when you elect a rider. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet information by contracting your registered representative or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. The percentages from previous effective periods are included in Appendix E to this prospectus.
If the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages that we are currently offering on the day the Contract and/or rider is issued are higher than the rates we were offering on the date you signed your rider election form, you will receive the higher set of rates. If any rates have decreased when we compare the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages that we are offering on the day you signed your rider election form to the set of rates that we are offering on the day your Contract and/or rider is issued, your Contract and/or rider will be issued with the set of rates that were in effect on the day you signed your rider election form.
i4LIFE® Advantage
i4LIFE® Advantage (the Variable Annuity Payout Option Rider in your Contract) is an optional Annuity Payout rider you may purchase at an additional cost and is separate and distinct from other Annuity Payout options offered under your Contract and described later in this prospectus. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Charge.
i4LIFE® Advantage provides variable, periodic Regular Income Payments for life subject to certain conditions. The optional Guaranteed Income Benefit, if available, provides a minimum payout floor for those Regular Income Payments. These payments are made during two time periods; an Access Period and a Lifetime Income Period, which are discussed in further detail below. If your Account Value is reduced to zero (except by additional withdrawals as described below), these payments will continue for your life (or the lives of you and your Secondary Life under the joint life option) during the Lifetime Income Period. i4LIFE® Advantage is different from other Annuity Payout options provided by Lincoln because with i4LIFE® Advantage, you have the ability to make additional withdrawals or surrender the Contract during the Access Period. If your Account Value is reduced to zero due to any withdrawals, i4LIFE®
36
Advantage will end and your Contract will terminate. The Guaranteed Income Benefit is described in further detail in Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.
When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, you must choose the Annuitant and Secondary Life (if applicable). The Annuitant and Secondary Life may not be changed after i4LIFE® Advantage is elected. For qualified contracts, the Secondary Life must be the spouse. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits regarding the impact of a change to the Annuitant prior to the i4LIFE® Advantage election.
If i4LIFE® Advantage is selected, the applicable transfer provisions among Subaccounts and the fixed account will continue to be those specified in your annuity contract for transfers on or before the selection of an Annuity Payout option. However, once i4LIFE® Advantage begins, any automatic withdrawal service will terminate. See The Contracts – Transfers on or Before the Selection of an Annuity Payout option.
Additional Purchase Payments may be made during the Access Period for an IRA annuity contract, unless a Guaranteed Income Benefit has been elected. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit option has been elected on an IRA contract, additional Purchase Payments may be made until the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is calculated. Additional Purchase Payments will not be accepted after the Periodic Income Commencement Date for a nonqualified annuity contract.
Availability. i4LIFE® Advantage is available for contracts with a Contract Value of at least $50,000 and may be elected at the time of application or at any time before any other Annuity Payout option under this Contract is elected by sending a completed i4LIFE® Advantage election form to our Home Office. Certain Living Benefit Riders allow a transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit below. If you intend to use the Protected Income Base or the Guaranteed Amount from a previously elected Living Benefit Rider to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you must elect the Guaranteed Income Benefit at the time you elect i4LIFE® Advantage. i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit is the only version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit that is currently available, if your Contract was issued prior to June 30, 2009, or unless you are guaranteed the right to elect a prior version under the terms of another Living Benefit Rider.
i4LIFE® Advantage is available on nonqualified annuities, IRAs and Roth IRAs (check with your registered representative regarding availability in the SEP market). i4LIFE® Advantage for IRA contracts is only available if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, are age 59½ or older at the time the rider is elected. i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit must be elected by age 90 on IRA contracts or age 99 on nonqualified contracts. i4LIFE® Advantage is not available to beneficiaries of IRA contracts. Additional limitations on issue ages and features may be necessary to comply with the IRC provisions for required minimum distributions.
Access Period. The Access Period begins on the Periodic Income Commencement Date and is a defined period of time during which we pay variable, periodic Regular Income Payments and provide a Death Benefit. During this period, you may surrender the Contract and make withdrawals from your Account Value (defined below). The Lifetime Income Period begins immediately at the end of the Access Period and the remaining Account Value is used to make Regular Income Payments for the rest of your life (or the Secondary Life if applicable). During the Lifetime Income Period, you will no longer be able to make withdrawals or surrenders or receive a Death Benefit. If your Account Value is reduced to zero because of Regular Income Payments or market loss, your Access Period ends.
The minimum and maximum Access Periods are established at the time you elect i4LIFE® Advantage with or without the Guaranteed Income Benefit. The current Access Period requirements are outlined in the following chart: 
 
Minimum Access Period
Maximum Access Period
i4LIFE® Advantage (without a Guaranteed Income
Benefit) for new elections on and after November 20,
2023
10 years
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
i4LIFE® Advantage (without a Guaranteed Income
Benefit) for elections prior to November 20, 2023
5 years
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for elections on and
after August 19, 2024
Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age
(nearest birthday) and age 85
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts, to age 100 for
qualified contracts
Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for elections prior to
August 19, 2024
Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age
(nearest birthday) and age 90
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections on or
after May 21, 2012
Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age
(nearest birthday) and age 100
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
37
 
Minimum Access Period
Maximum Access Period
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections prior to
May 21, 2012
Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age
(nearest birthday) and age 90
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2 and 3)
Longer of 15 years or the difference between your age
(nearest birthday) and age 85
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
 
The minimum Access Period requirements may vary if you transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit from another rider.
Generally, shorter Access Periods will produce a higher initial Regular Income Payment than longer Access Periods. At any time during the Access Period, you may extend or shorten the length of the Access Period subject to Home Office approval. Additional restrictions may apply if you are under age 59½ when you request a change to the Access Period. Currently, if you extend the Access Period, it must be extended at least 5 years. If you change the Access Period, subsequent Regular Income Payments will be adjusted accordingly, and the Account Value remaining at the end of the new Access Period will be applied to continue Regular Income Payments for your life. For versions 1, 2, and 3 of the Guaranteed Income Benefit, an extension of your Access Period will also reduce your i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit in proportion of the reduction in the Regular Income Payment. This reduction of the i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit does not apply to Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, or Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4). If you shorten the Access Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will terminate. Currently, changes to the Access Period can only be made on Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversaries.
Additional limitations on issue ages and features may be necessary to comply with the IRC provisions for required minimum distributions. We may reduce or terminate the Access Period for IRA i4LIFE® Advantage contracts in order to keep the Regular Income Payments in compliance with IRC provisions for required minimum distributions. If we lower the Access Period to comply with IRC provisions, there is no impact to the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
Account Value. The initial Account Value is the Contract Value on the Valuation Date i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or your initial Purchase Payment and Bonus Credit if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, the Account Value on a Valuation Date will equal the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, and will be reduced by Regular Income Payments and Guaranteed Income Benefit payments made as well as any withdrawals taken. You will have access to your Account Value during the Access Period. After the Access Period ends, the remaining Account Value will be applied to continue Regular Income Payments for your life (and the Secondary Life under the joint life option) and the Account Value will be reduced to zero.
Regular Income Payments during the Access Period. i4LIFE® Advantage provides for variable, periodic Regular Income Payments for as long as an Annuitant (or Secondary Life, if applicable) is living.
When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, you will make several choices that will impact the amount of your Regular Income Payments:
●
single or joint life option;
●
the date you will receive the initial Regular Income Payment;
●
the frequency of the payments (monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually);
●
the frequency the payment is recalculated;
●
the assumed investment return (AIR); and
●
the date the Access Period ends and the Lifetime Income Period begins.
Some of the choices will not be available if you elect the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
If you do not choose a payment frequency, the default is a monthly payment frequency. In most states, you may also elect to have Regular Income Payments from nonqualified contracts recalculated only once each year rather than recalculated at the time of each payment. This results in level Regular Income Payments between recalculation dates. Qualified contracts are only recalculated once per year, on December 31st (if not a Valuation Date, then on the first Valuation Date of the calendar year). For nonqualified contracts, the Contractowner must elect the levelized option for Regular Income Payments if Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected.
AIR rates of 3% or 4% may be available for Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage. For i4LIFE® Advantage elections prior to November 20, 2023, AIR rates of 5% and 6% were also available, but certain states had limited the availability of 5% and 6% AIR. The higher the AIR you choose, the higher your initial Regular Income Payment will be and the higher the return must be to increase subsequent Regular Income Payments. A 3% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments under Select Guaranteed Income Benefit election made prior to February 19, 2019; a 4% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments under all other versions of Guaranteed Income Benefit elections made on and after February 19, 2019 and May 17, 2020 and on and after August 19, 2024. The AIR used to calculate the Regular Income Payments if transitioning from a Prior Rider may be different.
38
Regular Income Payments must begin within one year of the date you elect i4LIFE® Advantage and will continue until the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life, if applicable, or surrender.
Regular Income Payments are not subject to any surrender charges or applicable Interest Adjustments. See Charges and Other Deductions. For information regarding income tax consequences of Regular Income Payments, see Federal Tax Matters.
The initial Regular Income Payment is calculated from the Account Value on a date no more than 14 days prior to the date you select to begin receiving Regular Income Payments. This calculation date is called the Periodic Income Commencement Date, and is the same date the Access Period begins. The amount of the initial Regular Income Payment is determined by dividing the Contract Value (or Purchase Payment if elected at contract issue), less applicable premium taxes by 1,000 and multiplying the result by an annuity factor. The annuity factor is based upon:
●
the age of the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable;
●
the length of the Access Period selected;
●
the frequency of the payments;
●
the AIR selected; and
●
the Individual Annuity Mortality table.
The annuity factor used to determine the Regular Income Payments reflects the fact that, during the Access Period, you have the ability to withdraw the entire Account Value and that a Death Benefit will be paid to your Beneficiary upon your death. These benefits during the Access Period result in a slightly lower Regular Income Payment, during both the Access Period and the Lifetime Income Period, than would be payable if this access was not permitted and no lump-sum Death Benefit was payable. (The Contractowner must elect an Access Period of no less than the minimum Access Period which is currently set at 10 years.) The annuity factor also reflects the requirement that there be sufficient Account Value at the end of the Access Period to continue your Regular Income Payments for the remainder of your life (and/or the Secondary Life if applicable), during the Lifetime Income Period, with no further access or Death Benefit.
The amount of your Regular Income Payment will be impacted by the length of the Access Period you have chosen. For example, if a 70-year old makes a $100,000 initial Purchase Payment, elects monthly payments, a 4% AIR, and a 20-year Access Period, the initial Regular Income Payment will be $504.96 per month ($6,059.60 annually). Using the same assumptions, but with a 30-year Access Period, the initial Regular Income Payment will be $448.41 per month ($5,380.90 annually).
The Account Value will vary with the actual net investment return of the Subaccounts selected and the interest credited on the fixed account, which then determines the subsequent Regular Income Payments during the Access Period. Each subsequent Regular Income Payment (unless the levelized option is selected) is determined by dividing the Account Value on the applicable Valuation Date by 1,000 and multiplying this result by an annuity factor revised to reflect the declining length of the Access Period. As a result of this calculation, the actual net returns in the Account Value are measured against the AIR to determine subsequent Regular Income Payments. If the actual net investment return (annualized) for the Contract exceeds the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will increase at a rate approximately equal to the amount of such excess. Conversely, if the actual net investment return for the Contract is less than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will decrease. For example, if net investment return is 3% higher (annualized) than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment for the next year will increase by approximately 3%. Conversely, if actual net investment return is 3% lower than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will decrease by approximately 3%.
Withdrawals made during the Access Period will also reduce the Account Value that is available for Regular Income Payments, and subsequent Regular Income Payments will be recalculated and could be increased or reduced, based on the Account Value following the withdrawal.
For a joint life option, if either the Annuitant or Secondary Life dies during the Access Period, Regular Income Payments will be recalculated using a revised annuity factor based on the single surviving life, if doing so provides a higher Regular Income Payment. On a joint life option, the Secondary Life must be either the primary Beneficiary or joint owner in order to receive the remaining payments after the first life’s death.
For nonqualified contracts, if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, both die during the Access Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit (if any) will terminate and the annuity factor will be revised for a non-life contingent Regular Income Payment and Regular Income Payments will continue until the Account Value is fully paid out and the Access Period ends. For qualified contracts, if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, both die during the Access Period, i4LIFE® Advantage (and any Guaranteed Income Benefit) will terminate.
Regular Income Payments during the Lifetime Income Period. The Lifetime Income Period begins at the end of the Access Period if either the Annuitant or Secondary Life is living. Your earlier elections regarding the frequency of Regular Income Payments, AIR and the frequency of the recalculation do not change. The initial Regular Income Payment during the Lifetime Income Period is determined by dividing the Account Value on the last Valuation Date of the Access Period by 1,000 and multiplying the result by an annuity factor revised to reflect that the Access Period has ended. The annuity factor is based upon:
●
the age of the Annuitant and Secondary Life (if living);
39
●
the frequency of the Regular Income Payments;
●
the AIR selected; and
●
the Individual Annuity Mortality table.
The impact of the length of the Access Period and any withdrawals made during the Access Period will continue to be reflected in the Regular Income Payments during the Lifetime Income Period. To determine subsequent Regular Income Payments, the Contract is credited with a fixed number of Annuity Units equal to the initial Regular Income Payment (during the Lifetime Income Period) divided by the Annuity Unit value (by Subaccount). Subsequent Regular Income Payments are determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units per Subaccount by the Annuity Unit value. Your Regular Income Payments will vary based on the value of your Annuity Units. If your Regular Income Payments are adjusted on an annual basis, the total of the annual payment is transferred to Lincoln Life's general account to be paid out based on the payment mode you selected. Your payment(s) will not be affected by market performance during that year. Your Regular Income Payment(s) for the following year will be recalculated at the beginning of the following year based on the current value of the Annuity Units.
Regular Income Payments will continue for as long as the Annuitant or Secondary Life, if applicable, is living, and will continue to be adjusted for investment performance of the Subaccounts your Annuity Units are invested in (and the fixed account if applicable). Regular Income Payments vary with investment performance.
During the Lifetime Income Period, there is no longer an Account Value; therefore, no withdrawals are available and no Death Benefit is payable. In addition, transfers are not allowed from a fixed annuity payment to a variable annuity payment.
i4LIFE® Advantage Credit. A quarterly i4LIFE® Advantage Credit is available if you select a minimum Access Period that is the longer of 20 years or the difference between your age and age 85, and you maintain a minimum threshold value. The threshold values and applicable credit percentages are outlined in the chart below. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit is only available if you elect i4LIFE® Advantage on and after November 20, 2023 (subject to state approval) and is not applied to Contracts with the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the first i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will apply three months from the contract issue date. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the first i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will apply three months from the first Regular Income Payment. Thereafter, it will apply every three months, if all conditions are met. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will end at the end of the Access Period. If the Contract is terminated for any reason, including death, no further i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will be paid. Proportionate credits will not be applied.
The amount of the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit is calculated on each quarterly Valuation Date by multiplying:
●
the variable Account Value on that date; by
●
the quarterly i4LIFE® Advantage Credit percentage (determined by the applicable tier). 
 
Tier 1
Tier 2
Minimum Threshold Value
$500,000
$1,000,000
Credit Percentage (Annually)
0.10%
0.20%
Credit Percentage (Quarterly)
0.025%
0.050%
If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial threshold value equals the initial Purchase Payment. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial threshold value equals the Account Value on the first Regular Income Payment date. The threshold value will be increased by additional Purchase Payments (qualified contracts only), which may cause your Contract to move into a Tier 1 threshold, or to move from a Tier 1 to a Tier 2 threshold and receive the applicable credit. Conversely, additional withdrawals (exclusive of i4LIFE® Advantage payments and required minimum distributions) will reduce your threshold value on a dollar-for-dollar basis, potentially dropping a Tier 2 contract to a Tier 1 contract, or to become ineligible for the credit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will not be applied when the minimum threshold value is not met at the time of the quarterly evaluation.
If you shorten the Access Period so that it no longer meets the stated requirement, the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will end. However, if you subsequently extend the Access Period to meet the requirement, the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will resume if the minimum threshold value requirement is met.
The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will be allocated to the Subaccounts in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount on the quarterly Valuation Date. There is no additional charge to receive this i4LIFE® Advantage Credit, and in no case will the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit be less than zero. The amount of any i4LIFE® Advantage Credit received will be noted on your quarterly statement. Confirmation statements for each individual transaction will not be issued. i4LIFE® Advantage Credits are not considered Purchase Payments.
Guaranteed Income Benefit
The Guaranteed Income Benefit is an optional benefit that is available for an additional charge. It provides that your Regular Income Payments will never be less than a minimum payout floor, regardless of the actual investment performance of your Contract. i4LIFE®
40
Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit is the only version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit that is currently available, if your Contract was issued prior to June 30, 2009, unless you are transitioning to Guaranteed Income Benefit from a Prior Rider.
If you purchase any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. In addition, the fixed account is not available except for use with dollar cost averaging. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements for more information. You will be subject to those Investment Requirements for the entire time you own the rider. Failure to comply with the Investment Requirements will result in the termination of the rider.
There is no guarantee that any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be available to elect in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue this option at any time. In addition, we may make different versions of the Guaranteed Income Benefit available to new purchasers or may create different versions for use with various Living Benefit Riders. However, certain Living Benefit Riders may guarantee a Contractowner the right to transition from that Prior Rider to a version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit that may no longer be offered. The transition rules are set forth below.
In certain states the total annual Guaranteed Income Benefit that would otherwise be payable may be subject to a maximum amount. Please refer to your Contract or contact your registered representative for more information.
Guaranteed Income Benefit Amount. For Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of your Account Value, based on your age (or the younger life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected, or if transitioning from a Prior Rider, the date of the first Regular Income Payment.
The following is an example of how the Guaranteed Amount from Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage may be used to calculate the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. The example assumes that a 4.5% Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage is used to calculate the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. 
Account Value (equals Contract Value on date i4LIFE® Advantage
Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected)
$100,000
 
Guaranteed Amount on the date i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed
Income Benefit is elected:
$140,000
 
Initial Regular Income Payment
$5,411
 
Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (4.5% x $140,000 Guaranteed
Amount which is greater than $100,000 Account Value)
$6,300
 
There are five versions of the Guaranteed Income Benefit. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1) is no longer available for election. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2, 3, and 4) may only be elected if you own a Living Benefit Rider that guarantees you the right to elect that version. A Contractowner with Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage who decides to transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be guaranteed the right to purchase the Guaranteed Income Benefit under the terms set forth in the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage rider. Please refer to your Living Benefit Rider regarding the availability of prior versions of Guaranteed Income Benefit.
For Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4), the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of your Account Value (or Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Guaranteed Amount), based on your age (or the age of the younger life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected.
For Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2 and 3), the Guaranteed Income Benefit is initially equal to 65% for Select Guaranteed Income Benefit election on or after August 19, 2024 (65% for Guaranteed Income Benefit elections prior to August 19, 2024) of the Regular Income Payment (which is based on your Account Value) in effect at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected.
Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages and Age-Bands. The specific percentages and applicable age-bands for calculating the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit are discussed below.
The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages applicable to new rider elections are determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the percentages may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. This percentage structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior percentages, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages will not change as a result.
Select Guaranteed Income Benefit. The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages applicable to new rider elections are set forth in a supplement to this prospectus, called a Rate Sheet. The Rate Sheet indicates the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage, its effective period, and the date by which your rider election form must be signed and dated for a Contract to be issued with that percentage. The percentages may change periodically and may be higher or lower than the percentages on the previous Rate Sheet.
41
The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages in the Rate Sheet can be superseded. The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages in any subsequent Rate Sheet may be higher or lower than the percentages on the previous Rate Sheet. Your rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on after the effective date of the Rate Sheet in order to get the percentage indicated in a Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.LincolnFinancial.com or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages for previous effective periods are included in an Appendix to this prospectus.
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4). Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) was available for purchase prior to October 5, 2016. For Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4), the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of your Account Value (or Guaranteed Amount as applicable), based on your age (or the age of the younger life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected. The specified percentages and the corresponding age-bands for calculating the Guaranteed Income Benefit under Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) are outlined in an Appendix to this prospectus. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) is only available for purchase if you are guaranteed the right to elect a prior version under a Prior Rider.
Guaranteed Income Benefit General Provisions
For all versions of the Guaranteed Income Benefit, if the amount of your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment has fallen below the Guaranteed Income Benefit, because of poor investment results, a payment equal to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is the minimum payment you will receive. If the market performance in your Contract is sufficient to provide Regular Income Payments at a level that exceeds the Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Guaranteed Income Benefit will never come into effect. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit is paid, it will be paid with the same frequency as your Regular Income Payment. If your Regular Income Payment is less than the Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will reduce the Account Value by the Regular Income Payment plus an additional amount equal to the difference between your Regular Income Payment and the Guaranteed Income Benefit (in other words, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments reduce the Account Value by the entire amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment.) This payment will be made from the variable Subaccounts proportionately, according to your investment allocations.
If your Account Value reaches zero as a result of payments to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will continue to pay you an amount equal to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. If your Account Value reaches zero, your Access Period will end and your Lifetime Income Period will begin. Additional amounts withdrawn from the Account Value to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit may terminate your Access Period earlier than originally scheduled, and will reduce your Death Benefit. If your Account Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits. After the Access Period ends, we will continue to pay the Guaranteed Income Benefit for as long as the Annuitant (or the Secondary Life, if applicable) is living.
The following example illustrates how poor investment performance, which results in a Guaranteed Income Benefit payment, affects the i4LIFE® Account Value: 
i4LIFE® Account Value before market decline
$135,000
i4LIFE® Account Value after market decline
$100,000
Monthly Guaranteed Income Benefit
$810
Monthly Regular Income Payment after market decline
$769
Account Value after market decline and Guaranteed Income Benefit
payment
$99,190
The Contractowner receives an amount equal to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. The entire amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit is deducted from the Account Value.
Guaranteed Income Benefit Step-up
Select Guaranteed Income Benefit and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4). For elections of Select Guaranteed Income Benefit on and after August 19, 2024, the Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step up every year to 65% of the current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. For elections of Select Guaranteed Income Benefit prior to August 19, 2024, and for all Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections, the Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step up every year to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. For nonqualified contracts, the step-up will occur annually on the first Valuation Date on or after each Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary starting on the first Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. For qualified contracts, the step-up will occur annually on the first Valuation Date of the first periodic income payment of each calendar year.
The following example illustrates how the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is calculated for a Contractowner with a nonqualified contract, and how a step-up would increase the Guaranteed Income Benefit in a subsequent year. The example assumes a 3.5% percentage was used to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit, and that the Account Value has increased due to positive investment
42
returns resulting in a higher recalculated Regular Income Payment. See Living Benefit Riders – i4LIFE® Advantage-Regular Income Payments during the Access Period for a discussion of recalculation of the Regular Income Payment. 
8/1/2025 Amount of initial Regular Income Payment
$4,801
8/1/2025 Account Value at election of Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4)
$100,000
8/1/2025 Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (3.5% x $100,000 Account Value)
$3,500
8/1/2026 Recalculated Regular Income Payment
$6,000
8/1/2026 Guaranteed Income Benefit after step-up (65% of $6,000)
$3,900
The Guaranteed Income Benefit was increased to 65% of the recalculated Regular Income Payment.
The next section describes any differences in how the Guaranteed Income Benefit works for Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3), Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2) and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1). All other features of the Guaranteed Income Benefit not discussed below are the same as in General Provisions above.
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3). Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3) was available for purchase on or after October 6, 2008 to December 31, 2010 (unless version 3 is available for election at any time per the terms of your Living Benefit Rider) on contracts purchased prior to June 30, 2009. For Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3) the Guaranteed Income Benefit is initially equal to 75% of the Regular Income Payment (which is based on your Account Value as defined in the i4LIFE® Advantage rider section) in effect at the time of the first Regular Income Payment.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step up every year to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. The step-up will occur on every Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary during a 5-year step-up period. At the end of a step-up period you may elect a new step-up period by submitting a written request to the Home Office. If you prefer, when you start the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you can request that we administer this election for you.
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2). Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2) was available for election prior to October 6, 2008 (unless version 2 is available for election at any time per the terms of a Living Benefit Rider). For Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2) the Guaranteed Income Benefit is initially equal to 75% of the Regular Income Payment (which is based on your Account Value as defined in the i4LIFE® Advantage rider section) in effect at the time of the first Regular Income Payment.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step-up every three years on the Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment, if the result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. The step-up will occur on every third Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary during a 15-year step-up period. At the end of a step-up period, you may elect a new 15-year step-up period by submitting a written request to the Home Office. If you prefer, when you start the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you can request that we administer this election for you.
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1). If you have Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1), your Guaranteed Income Benefit will not step-up on an anniversary, but will remain level. This version is no longer available for election.
The next section describes certain guarantees in Living Benefit Riders relating to the election of the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions
Certain Living Benefit Riders (“Prior Rider”) allow you to transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. 
If your Prior Rider is...
you will transition to…
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage riders purchased on or after
October 31, 2010
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4)
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage riders purchased on or after
October 6, 2008 and prior to October 31, 2010
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3)
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage riders purchased prior to October
6, 2008
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2)
 
The following discussion applies to all of these transitions.
If you have elected one of the Prior Riders listed above, you are guaranteed the right to transition to the applicable version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit even if that version is no longer available for purchase. You are also guaranteed that the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage and Access Period requirements will be at least as favorable as those in effect at the time you purchased
43
your Prior Rider. The Investment Requirements under your Prior Rider continue to apply after you transition to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements for a description of these investment requirements. The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of the greater of your Account Value or Protected Income Base or Guaranteed Amount, as applicable, based on your age (or the younger life under a joint life option) at the time of the first Regular Income Payment.
Your decision to transition to the Guaranteed Income Benefit must be made prior to the Annuity Commencement Date, and by the maximum age to elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, which is age 95 for nonqualified contracts and age 80 for qualified contracts.
If you have the single life option under your Prior Rider, you must transition to the single life option under i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit; joint life option must transition to the joint life option. The minimum Access Period requirements may vary based on which Prior Rider you elected, and are specifically listed in the chart below.
While i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect, the Contractowner cannot change the payment mode elected or decrease the length of the Access Period.
When deciding whether to transition from your Prior Rider to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, you should consider that depending on your age (and the age of your Secondary Life under the joint life option) and the selected length of the Access Period, i4LIFE® Advantage may provide a higher payout than the Protected Annual Income amounts from your Prior Rider. You should consider electing i4LIFE® Advantage when you are ready to immediately start receiving i4LIFE® Advantage payments, whereas with your Prior Rider, you may defer taking withdrawals until a later date. Payments from a nonqualified contract that a person receives under the i4LIFE® Advantage rider are treated as “amounts received as an annuity” under section 72 of the Internal Revenue Code because the payments occur after the annuity starting date. These payments are subject to an “exclusion ratio” as provided in section 72(b) of the Code, which means a portion of each Annuity Payout is treated as income (taxable at ordinary income rates), and the remainder is treated as a nontaxable return of Purchase Payments. In contrast, withdrawals under your Prior Rider are not treated as amounts received as an annuity because they occur prior to the annuity starting date. As a result, such withdrawals are treated first as a return of any existing gain in the Contract (which is the measure of the extent to which the Contract Value exceeds Purchase Payments), and then as a nontaxable return of Purchase Payments.
Accumulated Benefit Enhancement (ABESM) (Nonqualified contracts only). This benefit is no longer available. The ABESM Enhancement Amount was provided to eligible Contractowners of nonqualified i4LIFE® Advantage contracts only, if requested at the time of application, at no additional charge, and if certain conditions were met.
Upon the death of any Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant, the ABESM Enhancement Amount is payable in accordance with the terms of the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB Death Benefit.
The ABESM Enhancement Amount is equal to the excess of the prior contract’s documented Death Benefit(s) over the actual cash surrender value received by us. However, we will impose a limit on the prior contract’s Death Benefit equal to the lesser of:
●
140% of the prior contract’s cash value; or
●
the prior contract’s cash value plus $400,000.
In addition, if the actual cash surrender value we received was less than 95% of the documented cash value from the prior insurance company, the prior contract’s Death Benefit was reduced proportionately according to the reduction in cash value amounts.
Upon the death of any Contractowner or joint owner who was not a Contractowner on the effective date of the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB Death Benefit, the ABESM Enhancement Amount will be equal to zero (unless the change occurred because of the death of a Contractowner or joint owner). If any Contractowner or joint owner is changed due to a death and the new Contractowner or joint owner is age 76 or older when added to the Contract, then the ABESM Enhancement Amount for this new Contractowner or joint owner will be equal to zero.
The ABESM Enhancement Amount will terminate on the Valuation Date the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB Death Benefit option of the Contract is changed or terminated.
It is important to realize that even with the ABESM Enhancement Amount, your Death Benefit will in many cases be less than the Death Benefit from your prior company.
i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits
When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, the Death Benefit option that you previously elected will become the Death Benefit election under i4LIFE® Advantage, unless you elect a less expensive Death Benefit option. If you had previously elected EEB Death Benefit, you must elect a new Death Benefit. Existing Contractowners with the Account Value Death Benefit, who elect i4LIFE® Advantage must choose the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. The amount paid under the new Death Benefit may be less than the amount that would have been paid under the Death Benefit provided before i4LIFE® Advantage began (if premium taxes have been deducted from the Contract Value).
44
i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit is only available during the Access Period and is equal to the Account Value as of the Valuation Date on which we approve the payment of the death claim. You may not change this Death Benefit once it is elected.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit is only available during the Access Period and is equal to the greater of:
●
the Account Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
●
the sum of all Purchase Payments, less the sum of Regular Income Payments and other withdrawals where:
●
Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and withdrawals under a Prior Rider that are not Excess Withdrawals, reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the payment; and
●
all other withdrawals, if any, reduce the Death Benefit on either a dollar for dollar basis or in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value, depending on the terms of your Contract.
References to Purchase Payments and withdrawals include Purchase Payments and withdrawals made prior to the election of i4LIFE® Advantage if your Contract was in force with the Guarantee of Principal or greater Death Benefit option prior to that election. Withdrawals that were not treated as Excess Withdrawals under a Prior Rider will reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the withdrawal.
In a declining market, withdrawals which are deducted in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value, may have a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any.
The following example demonstrates the impact of a proportionate withdrawal on your Death Benefit: 
i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit
$200,000
 
Regular Income Payment
$25,000
 
Account Value at the time of additional withdrawal
$150,000
 
Additional withdrawal
$15,000
($15,000/$150,000=10% withdrawal)
 
 
Death Benefit Value after Regular Income Payment = $200,000 - $25,000 = $175,000
Reduction in Death Benefit value for withdrawal = $175,000 x 10% = $17,500
Death Benefit Value after additional withdrawal = $175,000 - $17,500 = $157,500
The Regular Income Payment reduced the Death Benefit by $25,000 and the additional withdrawal caused a 10% reduction in the Death Benefit, the same percentage that the withdrawal reduced the Account Value.
During the Access Period, contracts with the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit may elect to change to the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit by contacting us in writing at our Home Office. This change will be effective on the Valuation Date we receive the request, at our Home Office, and we will begin deducting the lower i4LIFE® Advantage charge at that time. Once the change is effective, you may not elect to return to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit.
i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB. The i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB is only available during the Access Period and is the greatest of:
●
the Account Value as of the Valuation Date on which we approve the payment of the claim; or
●
the sum of all Purchase Payments, less the sum of Regular Income Payments and other withdrawals where:
●
Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and withdrawals under a Prior Rider that are not Excess Withdrawals, reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the payment; and
●
all other withdrawals, if any, reduce the Death Benefit on either a dollar for dollar basis or in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value, depending on the terms of your Contract.
References to Purchase Payments and withdrawals include Purchase Payments and withdrawals made prior to the election of i4LIFE® Advantage if your Contract was in force with the Guarantee of Principal or greater Death Benefit option prior to that election; or
●
the highest Account Value or Contract Value on any contract anniversary date (including the inception date of the Contract) after the EGMDB is effective (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that contract anniversary) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased and prior to the date of death. The highest Account Value or Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits and is decreased by Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and all other withdrawals subsequent to the anniversary date on which the highest Account
45
Value or Contract Value is obtained. Regular Income Payments, including Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and withdrawals are deducted on either a dollar for dollar basis or in the same proportion that Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value, depending on the terms of your Contract.
If your Contract has the ABESM Enhancement Amount (if elected at the time of application) (see discussion under Accumulated Benefit Enhancement) specified in your contract benefit data pages as applicable on the date of death, this enhancement amount will be added to the sum of the Purchase Payments, but will be reduced by the Regular Income Payments and withdrawals on either a dollar for dollar basis or in the same proportion that the Regular Income Payment or withdrawal reduced the Contract Value or Account Value, depending on the terms of your Contract.
When determining the highest anniversary value, if you elected the EGMDB (or more expensive Death Benefit option) in the base contract and this Death Benefit was in effect when you purchased i4LIFE® Advantage, we will look at the Contract Value before i4LIFE® Advantage and the Account Value after the i4LIFE® Advantage election to determine the highest anniversary value. We will look at such values on the contract annual anniversary date.
In a declining market, withdrawals which are deducted in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Account Value, may have a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any.
Contracts with the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB may elect to change to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal or the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit by contacting us in writing at the Home Office. This change will be effective on the Valuation Date we receive the request, at our Home Office, and we will begin deducting the lower i4LIFE® Advantage charge at that time. Once the change is effective, you may not elect to return to the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB.
General Death Benefit Provisions. These Death Benefit options are only available during the Access Period and will terminate when the Account Value equals zero, because the Access Period terminates.
If there is a change in the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant during the life of the Contract, for any reason other than death, the only Death Benefit payable for the new person will be the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. On a joint life option, the Secondary Life must be either the primary Beneficiary or joint owner in order to receive the remaining payments after the first life’s death.
For nonqualified contracts, upon the death of the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant, the Contractowner (or Beneficiary) may elect to terminate the Contract and receive full payment of the Death Benefit or may elect to continue the Contract and receive Regular Income Payments. Upon the death of the Secondary Life, who is not also an owner, only the surrender value is paid.
If you are the owner of an IRA annuity contract, and there is no Secondary Life, and you die during the Access Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage will terminate. A spouse Beneficiary may start a new i4LIFE® Advantage program.
If a death occurs during the Access Period, the value of the Death Benefit will be determined as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim. Approval of payment will occur upon our receipt of all the following:
1.
an original certified death certificate or any other proof of death satisfactory to us; and
2.
written authorization for payment; and
3.
all required claim forms, fully completed (including selection of a settlement option).
Notwithstanding any provision of this Contract to the contrary, the payment of Death Benefits provided under this Contract must be made in compliance with Code Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable, as amended from time to time. Death Benefits may be taxable. See Federal Tax Matters.
Upon notification to us of the death, Regular Income Payments may be suspended until the death claim is approved by us. Upon approval, a lump sum payment for the value of any suspended payments will be made as of the date the death claim is approved, and Regular Income Payments will continue, if applicable. The excess, if any, of the Death Benefit over the Account Value will be credited into the Contract at that time.
If a lump sum settlement is elected, the proceeds will be mailed within seven days of approval by us of the claim subject to the laws, regulations and tax code governing payment of Death Benefits. This payment may be postponed as permitted by the Investment Company Act of 1940.
i4LIFE® Advantage General Provisions
Withdrawals. You may request a withdrawal at any time during the Access Period. We reduce the Account Value by the amount of the withdrawal, and all subsequent Regular Income Payments and Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, if applicable, will be recalculated. The Guaranteed Income Benefit is reduced proportionately. Withdrawals may have tax consequences. See Federal Tax Matters.
46
Withdrawals are subject to any applicable surrender charges except when amounts may be withdrawn free of surrender charges. See Charges and Other Deductions. The Interest Adjustment may apply.
The following example demonstrates the impact of a withdrawal on the Guaranteed Income Benefit payments: 
i4LIFE® Regular Income Payment before additional withdrawal
$1,200
 
Guaranteed Income Benefit before additional withdrawal
$900
 
Account Value at time of additional withdrawal
$150,000
 
Additional withdrawal
$15,000
(a 10% withdrawal)
 
 
Reduction in Guaranteed Income Benefit for additional withdrawal = $900 x 10% = $90
Guaranteed Income Benefit after additional withdrawal = $900 - $90 = $810
Surrender. At any time during the Access Period, you may surrender the Contract by withdrawing the surrender value. If the Contract is surrendered, the Contract terminates and no further Regular Income Payments will be made. Withdrawals are subject to any applicable surrender charges except when amounts may be withdrawn free of surrender charges. See Charges and Other Deductions. The Interest Adjustment may apply.
Termination. You may terminate i4LIFE® Advantage prior to the end of the Access Period by notifying us in writing. The termination will be effective on the next Valuation Date after we receive the notice.
For IRA annuity contracts, upon termination, the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will end and your base contract expense will resume. Your Contract Value upon termination will be equal to the Account Value on the Valuation Date we terminate i4LIFE® Advantage.
For nonqualified contracts, your i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefit will terminate, and the Account Value Death Benefit will be in effect. The i4LIFE® Advantage charge will end, and the charge for the Account Value Death Benefit will begin. All earnings in the Contract will be subject to income taxation in the year of the termination. A termination will be treated as a surrender for income tax purposes. If you choose to keep your underlying contract in force, this transaction will be treated as a repurchase for purposes of calculating future income taxes. Your Contract Value upon termination will be equal to the Account Value on the Valuation Date we terminate i4LIFE® Advantage.
i4LIFE® Advantage will terminate due to any of the following events:
●
the death of the Annuitant (or the later of the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life if a joint payout was elected); or
●
a Contractowner requested a decrease in the Access Period or a change to the Regular Income Payment frequency; or
●
upon written notice from the Contractowner to us; or
●
assignment of the Contract; or
●
failure to comply with Investment Requirements.
A termination of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit due to a decrease in the Access Period, a change in the Regular Income Payment frequency, or upon written notice from the Contractowner will be effective as of the Valuation Date on the next Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. Termination will be only for the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit and not the i4LIFE® Advantage election, unless otherwise specified. However, if you used the greater of the Account Value, Protected Income Base, or Guaranteed Amount under a previously held Living Benefit Rider to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit, any termination of the Guaranteed Income Benefit will also result in a termination of the i4LIFE® Advantage election. If you terminate the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit you may be able to re-elect it, if available, after one year. The election will be treated as a new purchase, subject to the terms and charges in effect at the time of election and the i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment will be recalculated. The i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be based on the Account Value at the time of the election.
Annuity Payouts
When you apply for a Contract, you may select any Annuity Commencement Date permitted by law, which is usually on or before the Annuitant's 99th birthday. This requires Contractowners to choose an Annuity Payout option or take irrevocable withdrawals through an Automatic Withdrawal Service, if not being taken already (state variations apply). This is not required for Contractowners who have elected i4LIFE® Advantage or any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount Annuity Payout Option or the Protected Annual Income Payout Option. Your broker-dealer may recommend that you choose this at an earlier age.
The Contract provides optional forms of payouts of annuities (annuity options), each of which is payable on a variable basis, a fixed basis or a combination of both as you specify. The Contract provides that all or part of the Contract Value may be used to purchase an Annuity Payout option. The minimum rates used to purchase any of the annuity options discussed below are shown in the Contract.
47
You may elect Annuity Payouts in monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual installments. If the payouts from any Subaccount would be or become less than $50, we have the right to reduce their frequency until the payouts are at least $50 each. Following are explanations of the annuity options available.
Annuity Options
The annuity options outlined below do not apply to Contractowners who have elected i4LIFE® Advantage, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount Annuity Payout Option or the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option.
Life Annuity. This option offers a periodic payout during the lifetime of the Annuitant and ends with the last payout before the death of the Annuitant. This option offers the highest periodic payout since there is no guarantee of a minimum number of payouts or provision for a Death Benefit for Beneficiaries. However, there is the risk under this option that the recipient would receive no payouts if the Annuitant dies before the date set for the first payout; only one payout if death occurs before the second scheduled payout, and so on. The Annuitant must be under age 81 to elect this option.
Life Annuity with Payouts Guaranteed for Designated Period. This option guarantees periodic payouts during a designated period, usually 10 or 20 years, and then continues throughout the lifetime of the Annuitant. The designated period is selected by the Contractowner.
Joint Life Annuity. This option offers a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. The payouts continue during the lifetime of the survivor. However, under a joint life annuity, if both Annuitants die before the date set for the first payout, no payouts will be made. Only one payment would be made if both deaths occur before the second scheduled payout, and so on.
Joint Life Annuity with Guaranteed Period. This option guarantees periodic payouts during a designated period, usually 10 or 20 years, and continues during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. The payouts continue during the lifetime of the survivor. The designated period is selected by the Contractowner.
Joint Life and Two Thirds to Survivor Annuity. This option provides a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. When one of the joint Annuitants dies, the survivor receives two thirds of the periodic payout made when both were alive.
Joint Life and Two-Thirds Survivor Annuity with Guaranteed Period. This option provides a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a joint Annuitant. When one of the joint Annuitants dies, the survivor receives two-thirds of the periodic payout made when both were alive. This option further provides that should one or both of the Annuitants die during the elected guaranteed period, usually 10 or 20 years, full benefit payment will continue for the rest of the guaranteed period.
Life Annuity with Unit Refund. This option offers a periodic payout during the lifetime of the Annuitant with the guarantee that upon death a payout will be made of the value of the number of Annuity Units (see Variable Annuity Payouts) equal to the excess, if any, of:
●
the total amount applied under this option divided by the Annuity Unit value for the date payouts begin, minus
●
the Annuity Units represented by each payout to the Annuitant multiplied by the number of payouts paid before death.
The value of the number of Annuity Units is computed on the date the death claim is approved for payment by the Home Office.
Life Annuity with Cash Refund. Fixed annuity benefit payments that will be made for the lifetime of the Annuitant with the guarantee that upon death, should (a) the total dollar amount applied to purchase this option be greater than (b) the fixed annuity benefit payment multiplied by the number of annuity benefit payments paid prior to death, then a refund payment equal to the dollar amount of (a) minus (b) will be made.
Under the annuity options listed above, you may not make withdrawals. Other options, with or without withdrawal features, may be made available by us. You may pre-select an Annuity Payout option as a method of paying the Death Benefit to a Beneficiary. If you do, the Beneficiary cannot change this payout option. You may change or revoke in writing to our Home Office, any such selection, unless such selection was made irrevocable. If you have not already chosen an Annuity Payout option, the Beneficiary may choose any Annuity Payout option. At death, options are only available to the extent they are consistent with the requirements of the Contract as well as Sections 72(s) and 401(a)(9) of the tax code, if applicable.
General Information
Any previously selected Death Benefit in effect before the selection of an Annuity Payout option will no longer be available on and after the selection of an Annuity Payout option. You may change the Annuity Commencement Date, change the annuity option or change the allocation of the investment among Subaccounts up to 30 days before the scheduled Annuity Commencement Date, upon written notice to the Home Office. You must give us at least 30 days’ notice before the date on which you want payouts to begin. We may require proof of age, sex, or survival of any payee upon whose age, sex, or survival payments depend.
Unless you select another option, the Contract automatically provides for a life annuity with Annuity Payouts guaranteed for 10 years (on a fixed, variable or combination fixed and variable basis, in proportion to the account allocations at the time of annuitization) except when a joint life payout is required by law. Under any option providing for guaranteed period payouts, the number of payouts
48
which remain unpaid at the date of the Annuitant’s death (or surviving Annuitant’s death in case of joint life Annuity) will be paid to you or your Beneficiary as payouts become due after we are in receipt of:
●
An original certified death certificate or other proof of death satisfactory to us;
●
written authorization for payment; and
●
all claim forms, fully completed.
Variable Annuity Payouts
Variable Annuity Payouts will be determined using:
●
the Contract Value on the selection of an Annuity Payout option, less any surrender charges on Purchase Payments made within twelve months of annuitization and any applicable premium taxes;
●
the annuity tables contained in the Contract;
●
the annuity option selected; and
●
the investment performance of the fund(s) selected.
To determine the amount of payouts, we make this calculation:
1.
Determine the dollar amount of the first periodic payout; then
2.
Credit the Contract with a fixed number of Annuity Units equal to the first periodic payout divided by the Annuity Unit value; and
3.
Calculate the value of the Annuity Units each period thereafter.
Annuity Payouts assume an investment return of 3%, 4%, 5% or 6% per year, as applied to the applicable mortality table. Some of these assumed interest rates may not be available in your state; therefore, please check with your registered representative. You may choose your assumed interest rate at the time you elect a variable Annuity Payout on the administrative form provided by us. The higher the assumed interest rate you choose, the higher your initial annuity payment will be. The amount of each payout after the initial payout will depend upon how the underlying fund(s) perform, relative to the assumed rate. If the actual net investment rate (annualized) exceeds the assumed rate, the payment will increase at a rate proportional to the amount of such excess. Conversely, if the actual net investment rate is less than the assumed rate, annuity payments will decrease. The higher the assumed interest rate, the less likely future annuity payments are to increase, or the payments will increase more slowly than if a lower assumed rate was used. There is a more complete explanation of this calculation in the SAI.
Fixed Side of the Contract
Currently the fixed account is available for dollar cost averaging purposes only.
You may allocate Purchase Payments to the fixed side of the contract, if available. Allocations made to the fixed side of the contract are added to your Contract Value. Certain charges related to the Contract and the charges for the Living Benefit Riders are deducted from your Contract Value. Therefore, a portion of those charges may be deducted from the fixed account. See Charges and Other Deductions section of this prospectus for more information. Since amounts in the fixed account make up part of your Contract Value, those amounts may be used to calculate benefits under the Living Benefit Riders. See the Living Benefit Riders section in this prospectus for more information.
Purchase Payments and Contract Value allocated to the fixed side of the contract become part of our general account, and do not participate in the investment experience of the VAA. The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the Indiana Department of Insurance as well as the insurance laws and regulations of the jurisdictions in which the contracts are distributed.
In reliance on certain exemptions, exclusions and rules, we have not registered interests in the general account as a security under the Securities Act of 1933 and have not registered the general account as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the general account nor any interests in it are regulated under the 1933 Act or the 1940 Act. We have been advised that the staff of the SEC has not made a review of the disclosures which are included in this prospectus which relate to our general account and to the fixed account under the Contract. These disclosures, however, may be subject to certain provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses. This prospectus is generally intended to serve as a disclosure document only for aspects of the Contract involving the VAA, and therefore contains only selected information regarding the fixed side of the contract. Complete details regarding the fixed side of the contract are in the Contract.
We guarantee an annual effective interest rate of not less than 1.50% per year on amounts held in a fixed account. Contracts issued in certain states or those contracts issued prior to June 2, 2003 may guarantee a higher minimum rate of interest. Refer to your Contract for the specific guaranteed minimum interest rate applicable to your Contract. Any amount surrendered, withdrawn from or transferred out of a fixed account prior to the expiration of the Guaranteed Period is subject to the Interest Adjustment and other charges (see Interest Adjustment and Charges and Other Deductions). This may reduce your value upon surrender, withdrawal or transfer but will not reduce the amount below the value it would have had if 1.50% (or the guaranteed minimum interest rate for your
49
Contract) interest had been credited to the fixed account. Refer to Transfers On or Before the Selection of an Annuity Payout Option and Transfers After the Selection of an Annuity Payout Option for additional transfer restrictions from the fixed account.
ANY INTEREST IN EXCESS OF 1.50% (OR THE GUARANTEED MINIMUM INTEREST RATE STATED IN YOUR CONTRACT) WILL BE DECLARED IN ADVANCE AT OUR SOLE DISCRETION. CONTRACTOWNERS BEAR THE RISK THAT NO INTEREST IN EXCESS OF THE MINIMUM INTEREST RATE WILL BE DECLARED.
Your Contract may not offer a fixed account or if permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting Purchase Payments or transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. Please contact your registered representative for further information. Older versions of the Contract may not provide for Guaranteed Periods or an Interest Adjustment (below).
Guaranteed Periods
The fixed account is divided into separate Guaranteed Periods, which credit guaranteed interest.
You may allocate Purchase Payments to one or more Guaranteed Periods of 1 to 10 years. We may add Guaranteed Periods or discontinue accepting Purchase Payments into one or more Guaranteed Periods at any time. The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment that can be allocated to a Guaranteed Period is $2,000. Each Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit allocated to the fixed account will start its own Guaranteed Period and will earn a guaranteed interest rate. The duration of the Guaranteed Period affects the guaranteed interest rate of the fixed account. A Guaranteed Period ends on the date after the number of calendar years in the Guaranteed Period. Interest will be credited daily at a guaranteed rate that is equal to the effective annual rate determined on the first day of the Guaranteed Period. Amounts surrendered, transferred or withdrawn prior to the end of the Guaranteed Period will be subject to the Interest Adjustment. Each Guaranteed Period Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit will be treated separately for purposes of determining any applicable Interest Adjustment. Any amount withdrawn from a Guaranteed Period may be subject to any applicable surrender charges, account fees and premium taxes.
You may transfer amounts from the fixed account to the variable Subaccount(s) subject to the following restrictions:
●
fixed account transfers are limited to 25% of the value of that fixed account in any 12-month period; and
●
the minimum amount that can be transferred is $300 or, if less, the amount in the fixed account.
Because of these restrictions, it may take several years to transfer amounts from the fixed account to the variable Subaccounts. You should carefully consider whether the fixed account meets your investment criteria. Any amount withdrawn from the fixed account may be subject to any applicable surrender charges, account fees and premium taxes.
We will notify the Contractowner in writing at least 30 days prior to the expiration date for any Guaranteed Period amount. A new Guaranteed Period of the same duration as the previous Guaranteed Period will begin automatically at the end of the previous Guaranteed Period, unless we receive, prior to the end of a Guaranteed Period, a written election by the Contractowner. The written election may request the transfer of the Guaranteed Period amount to a different fixed account or to a variable Subaccount from among those being offered by us. Transfers of any Guaranteed Period amount which become effective upon the date of expiration of the applicable Guaranteed Period are not subject to the limitation of twelve transfers per Contract Year or the additional fixed account transfer restrictions.
Interest Adjustment
Any surrender, withdrawal or transfer of a Guaranteed Period amount before the end of the Guaranteed Period (other than dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment, Maximum Annual Withdrawals under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, or Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage) will be subject to the Interest Adjustment. A surrender, withdrawal or transfer effective upon the expiration date of the Guaranteed Period will not be subject to the Interest Adjustment. The Interest Adjustment will be applied to the amount being surrendered, withdrawn or transferred. The Interest Adjustment will be applied after the deduction of any applicable account fees. Any transfer, withdrawal, or surrender of Contract Value from the fixed account will be increased or decreased by an Interest Adjustment, unless the transfer, withdrawal or surrender is effective:
●
during the free look period (See Return Privilege).
●
on the expiration date of a Guaranteed Period.
●
as a result of the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant.
●
subsequent to the diagnosis of a terminal illness of the Contractowner. Diagnosis of the terminal illness must be after the effective date of the Contract and result in a life expectancy of less than one year, as determined by a qualified professional medical practitioner. For contracts with Bonus Credits, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this waiver will apply.
●
subsequent to the admittance of the Contractowner into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. Admittance into such facility must be after the effective date of the Contract and continue for 90 consecutive days prior to the surrender or withdrawal. For contracts with Bonus Credits, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this waiver will apply.
50
●
subsequent to the permanent and total disability of the Contractowner if such disability begins after the effective date of the Contract and prior to the 65th birthday of the Contractowner. For contracts with Bonus Credits, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this waiver will apply.
●
upon annuitization of the Contract.
These provisions may not be applicable to your Contract or available in your state. Please check with your registered representative regarding the availability of these provisions.
In general, the Interest Adjustment reflects the relationship between the yield rate in effect at the time a Purchase Payment is allocated to a fixed subaccount’s Guaranteed Period under the Contract and the yield rate in effect at the time of the Purchase Payment’s surrender, withdrawal or transfer. It also reflects the time remaining in the Guaranteed Period. If the yield rate at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer is lower than the yield rate at the time the Purchase Payment was allocated, then the application of the Interest Adjustment will generally result in a higher payment at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer. Similarly, if the yield rate at the time of surrender, withdrawal or transfer is higher than the yield rate at the time of the allocation of the Purchase Payment, then the application of the Interest Adjustment will generally result in a lower payment at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer. The yield rate is published by the Federal Reserve Board.
The Interest Adjustment is calculated by multiplying the transaction amount by: 
(1+A)n
–1
(1+B+K)n
 
where:
A
=
yield rate for a U.S. Treasury security with time to maturity equal to the Subaccount’s Guaranteed Period, determined at
the beginning of the Guaranteed Period.
B
=
yield rate for a U.S. Treasury security with time to maturity equal to the time remaining in the Guaranteed Period if greater
than one year, determined at the time of surrender, withdrawal or transfer. For remaining periods of one year or less, the
yield rate for a one year U.S. Treasury security is used.
K
=
a 0.25% adjustment (unless otherwise limited by applicable state law). This adjustment builds into the formula a factor
representing direct and indirect costs to us associated with liquidating general account assets in order to satisfy
surrender requests. This adjustment of 0.25% has been added to the denominator of the formula because it is anticipated
that a substantial portion of applicable general account portfolio assets will be in relatively illiquid securities. Thus, in
addition to direct transaction costs, if such securities must be sold (e.g., because of surrenders), the market price may be
lower. Accordingly, even if interest rates decline, there will not be a positive adjustment until this factor is overcome, and
then any adjustment will be lower than otherwise, to compensate for this factor. Similarly, if interest rates rise, any
negative adjustment will be greater than otherwise, to compensate for this factor. If interest rates stay the same, there will
be no Interest Adjustment.
n
=
The number of years remaining in the Guaranteed Period (e.g., 1 year and 73 days = 1 + (73 divided by 365) = 1.2 years).
 
 
Straight-Line interpolation is used for periods to maturity not quoted.
See the SAI for examples of the application of the Interest Adjustment.
Small Contract Surrenders
We may surrender your Contract, in accordance with the laws of your state if:
●
your Contract Value drops below certain state specified minimum amounts ($1,000 or less) for any reason, including if your Contract Value decreases due to the performance of the Subaccounts you selected;
●
no Purchase Payments have been received for two (2) full, consecutive Contract Years; and
●
the annuity benefit at the selection of an Annuity Payout option would be less than $20.00 per month (these requirements may differ in some states).
At least 60 days before we surrender your Contract, we will send you a letter at your last address we have on file, to inform you that your Contract will be surrendered. You will have the opportunity to make additional Purchase Payments to bring your Contract Value above the minimum level to avoid surrender. If we surrender your Contract, we will not assess any surrender charge. We will not surrender your Contract if you are receiving guaranteed payments from us under one of the Living Benefit Riders.
Delay of Payments
Contract proceeds from the VAA will be paid within seven days, except:
●
when the NYSE is closed (other than weekends and holidays);
●
times when market trading is restricted or the SEC declares an emergency, and we cannot value units or the funds cannot redeem shares; or
51
●
when the SEC so orders to protect Contractowners.
Payment of contract proceeds from the fixed account may be delayed for up to six months.
Due to federal laws designed to counter terrorism and prevent money laundering by criminals, we may be required to reject a Purchase Payment and/or deny payment of a request for transfers, withdrawals, surrenders, or Death Benefits, until instructions are received from the appropriate regulator. We also may be required to provide additional information about a Contractowner's account to government regulators.
Reinvestment Privilege
You may elect to make a reinvestment purchase with any part of the proceeds of a surrender/withdrawal, (including previously credited Bonus Credits), and we will recredit that portion of the surrender/withdrawal charges attributable to the amount returned.
This election must be made by your written authorization to us on an approved Lincoln reinvestment form and received in our Home Office within 30 days of the date of the surrender/withdrawal, and the repurchase must be of a Contract covered by this prospectus. Lincoln reserves the right to not reinstate certain riders that were in effect prior to the surrender/withdrawal. In the case of a qualified retirement plan, a representation must be made that the proceeds being used to make the purchase have retained their tax-favored status under an arrangement for which the contracts offered by this prospectus are designed. The number of Accumulation Units which will be credited when the proceeds are reinvested will be based on the value of the Accumulation Unit(s) on the next Valuation Date. This computation will occur following receipt of the proceeds and request for reinvestment at the Home Office. You may utilize the reinvestment privilege only once. No Bonus Credits will apply when a reinvestment purchase occurs. For tax reporting purposes, we will treat a surrender/withdrawal and a subsequent reinvestment purchase as separate transactions (and a Form 1099 may be issued, if applicable). Any taxable distribution that is reinvested may still be reported as taxable. You should consult a tax advisor before you request a surrender/withdrawal or subsequent reinvestment purchase.
We may not accept reinvestment into the fixed side of the contract.
Amendment of Contract
We reserve the right to amend the Contract to meet the requirements of the 1940 Act or other applicable federal or state laws or regulations. You will be notified in writing of any changes, modifications or waivers. Any changes are subject to prior approval of your state’s insurance department (if required).
Distribution of the Contracts
Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) serves as Principal Underwriter of this Contract. LFD is affiliated with Lincoln Life and is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and is a member of FINRA (Financial Industry Regulatory Authority). The Principal Underwriter has entered into selling agreements with broker-dealers that are unaffiliated with us (“Selling Firms”). While the Principal Underwriter has the legal authority to make payments to broker-dealers which have entered into selling agreements, we will make such payments on behalf of the Principal Underwriter in compliance with appropriate regulations. We also pay on behalf of LFD certain of its operating expenses related to the distribution of this and other of our contracts. The Principal Underwriter may also offer “non-cash compensation”, as defined under FINRA’s rules, which includes among other things, merchandise, gifts, marketing support, sponsorships, seminars, entertainment and travel expenses. You should ask your registered representative how the broker-dealer will be compensated for the sale of the Contract to you, or for any alternative proposal that may have been presented to you. You should take such compensation into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation made to you in connection with the purchase of a Contract. The following paragraphs describe how payments are made by us and the Principal Underwriter to various parties.
Compensation Paid to Selling Firms. The Principal Underwriter pays commissions to all Selling Firms. The maximum commission the Principal Underwriter pays to Selling Firms is 7.00% of Purchase Payments. Some Selling Firms may elect to receive a lower commission when a Purchase Payment is made along with an earlier quarterly payment based on Contract Value for so long as the Contract’s Selling Firm remains in effect. Upon annuitization, the maximum commission the Principal Underwriter pays to Selling Firms is 7.00% of annuitized value and/or ongoing annual compensation of up to 1.15% of annuity value or statutory reserves. LFD also acts as wholesaler of the contracts and performs certain marketing and other functions in support of the distribution and servicing of the contracts.
LFD may pay certain Selling Firms or their affiliates additional amounts for, among other things: (1) “preferred product” treatment of the contracts in their marketing programs, which may include marketing services and increased access to registered representatives; (2) sales incentives relating to the contracts; (3) costs associated with sales conferences and educational seminars for their registered representatives; (4) other sales expenses incurred by them; and (5) inclusion in the financial products the Selling Firm offers.
Lincoln Life may provide loans to broker-dealers or their affiliates to help finance marketing and distribution of the contracts, and those loans may be forgiven if aggregate sales goals are met. In addition, we may provide staffing or other administrative support and
52
services to broker-dealers who distribute the contracts. LFD, as wholesaler, may make bonus payments to certain Selling Firms based on aggregate sales of our variable insurance contracts (including the contracts) or persistency standards.
These additional types of compensation are not offered to all Selling Firms. The terms of any particular agreement governing compensation may vary among Selling Firms and the amounts may be significant. The prospect of receiving, or the receipt of, additional compensation may provide Selling Firms and/or their registered representatives with an incentive to favor sales of the contracts over other variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to which a Selling Firm receives lower levels of or no additional compensation. You may wish to take such payment arrangements into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts. Additional information relating to compensation paid in 2024 is contained in the SAI.
Compensation Paid to Other Parties. Depending on the particular selling arrangements, there may be others whom LFD compensates for the distribution activities. For example, LFD may compensate certain “wholesalers”, who control access to certain selling offices, for access to those offices or for referrals, and that compensation may be separate from the compensation paid for sales of the contracts. LFD may compensate marketing organizations, associations, brokers or consultants which provide marketing assistance and other services to broker-dealers who distribute the contracts, and which may be affiliated with those broker-dealers. Commissions and other incentives or payments described above are not charged directly to Contractowners or the VAA. All compensation is paid from our resources, which include fees and charges imposed on your Contract.
Contractowner Questions
The obligations to purchasers under the contracts are those of Lincoln Life. This prospectus provides a general description of the material features of the Contract. Contracts, endorsements and riders may vary as required by state law. Questions about your Contract should be directed to us at 1-800-942-5500.
Federal Tax Matters
Introduction
The Federal income tax treatment of the Contract is complex and sometimes uncertain. The Federal income tax rules may vary with your particular circumstances. This discussion does not include all the Federal income tax rules that may affect you and your Contract. This discussion also does not address other Federal tax consequences (including consequences of sales to foreign individuals or entities), or state or local tax consequences, associated with the Contract. As a result, you should always consult a tax advisor about the application of tax rules found in the Internal Revenue Code (“Code”), Treasury Regulations and applicable IRS guidance to your individual situation.
Nonqualified Annuities
This part of the discussion describes some of the Federal income tax rules applicable to nonqualified annuities. A nonqualified annuity is a contract not issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan, such as an IRA or a section 403(b) plan, receiving special tax treatment under the Code. We may not offer nonqualified annuities for all of our annuity products.
Tax Deferral On Earnings
Under the Code, you are generally not subject to tax on any increase in your Contract Value until you receive a Contract distribution. However, for this general rule to apply, certain requirements must be satisfied:
●
An individual must own the Contract (or the Code must treat the Contract as owned by an individual).
●
The investments of the VAA must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Treasury regulations.
●
Your right to choose particular investments for a Contract must be limited.
●
The Annuity Commencement Date must not occur near the end of the Annuitant’s life expectancy.
Contracts Not Owned By An Individual
If a Contract is owned by an entity (rather than an individual) the Code generally does not treat it as an annuity contract for Federal income tax purposes. This means that the entity owning the Contract pays tax currently on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract. Examples of contracts where the owner pays current tax on the Contract’s earnings, Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits, if applicable, are contracts issued to a corporation or a trust. Some exceptions to the rule are:
●
Contracts in which the named owner is a trust or other entity that holds the Contract as an agent for an individual; however, this exception does not apply in the case of any employer that owns a contract to provide deferred compensation for its employees;
●
Immediate annuity contracts, purchased with a single premium, when the annuity starting date is no later than a year from purchase and substantially equal periodic payments are made, not less frequently than annually, during the Annuity Payout period;
●
Contracts acquired by an estate of a decedent;
●
Certain qualified contracts;
53
●
Contracts purchased by employers upon the termination of certain qualified plans; and
●
Certain contracts used in connection with structured settlement agreements.
Investments In The VAA Must Be Diversified
For a Contract to be treated as an annuity for Federal income tax purposes, the investments of the VAA must be “adequately diversified.” Treasury regulations define standards for determining whether the investments of the VAA are adequately diversified. If the VAA fails to comply with these diversification standards, you could be required to pay tax currently on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract. Although we do not control the investments of the underlying investment options, we expect that the underlying investment options will comply with the Treasury regulations so that the VAA will be considered “adequately diversified.”
Restrictions
The Code limits your right to choose particular investments for the Contract. Because the IRS has issued little guidance specifying those limits, the limits are uncertain and your right to allocate Contract Values among the Subaccounts may exceed those limits. If so, you would be treated as the owner of the assets of the VAA and thus subject to current taxation on the income, Bonus Credits, Persistency Credits, and gains, if applicable, from those assets. We do not know what limits may be set by the IRS in any guidance that it may issue and whether any such limits will apply to existing contracts. We reserve the right to modify the Contract without your consent in an attempt to prevent you from being considered as the owner of the assets of the VAA for purposes of the Code.
Loss Of Interest Deduction
After June 8, 1997, if a Contract is issued to a taxpayer that is not an individual, or if a Contract is held for the benefit of an entity, the entity may lose a portion of its deduction for otherwise deductible interest expenses. However, this rule does not apply to a Contract owned by an entity engaged in a trade or business that covers the life of one individual who is either (i) a 20% Owner of the entity, or (ii) an officer, director, or employee of the trade or business, at the time first covered by the Contract. This rule also does not apply to a Contract owned by an entity engaged in a trade or business that covers the joint lives of the 20% Owner or the entity and the Owner’s spouse at the time first covered by the Contract.
Age At Which Annuity Payouts Begin
The Code does not expressly identify a particular age by which Annuity Payouts must begin. However, those rules do require that an annuity contract provide for amortization, through Annuity Payouts, of the Contract’s Purchase Payments, Bonus Credits, Persistency Credits, and earnings. As long as annuity payments begin or are scheduled to begin on a date on which the Annuitant’s remaining life expectancy is enough to allow for a sufficient Annuity Payout period, the Contract should be treated as an annuity. If the annuity contract is not treated as an annuity, you would be currently taxed on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract.
Tax Treatment Of Payments
We make no guarantees regarding the tax treatment of any Contract or of any transaction involving a Contract. However, the rest of this discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity under the Code and that any increase in your Contract Value will not be taxed until there is a distribution from your Contract.
Taxation Of Withdrawals And Surrenders
You will pay tax on withdrawals to the extent your Contract Value exceeds your investment in the Contract. This income (and all other income from your Contract) is considered ordinary income (and does not receive capital gains treatment and is not qualified dividend income). You will pay tax on a surrender to the extent the amount you receive exceeds your investment in the Contract. In certain circumstances, your Purchase Payments and investment in the Contract are reduced by amounts received from your Contract that were not included in income. Surrender and reinstatement of your Contract will generally be taxed as a withdrawal. If your Contract has a Living Benefit Rider, and if the guaranteed amount under that rider immediately before a withdrawal exceeds your Contract Value, the Code may require that you include those additional amounts in your income. Please consult your tax advisor.
Taxation Of Annuity Payouts, including Regular Income Payments
The Code imposes tax on a portion of each Annuity Payout (at ordinary income tax rates) and treats a portion as a nontaxable return of your investment in the Contract. We will notify you annually of the taxable amount of your Annuity Payout. Once you have recovered the total amount of the investment in the Contract, you will pay tax on the full amount of your Annuity Payouts. If Annuity Payouts end because of the Annuitant’s death and before the total amount in the Contract has been distributed, the amount not received will generally be deductible. If withdrawals, other than Regular Income Payments, are taken from i4LIFE® Advantage during the Access Period, they are taxed subject to an exclusion ratio that is determined based on the amount of the payment.
54
Taxation Of Death Benefits
We may distribute amounts from your Contract because of the death of a Contractowner or an Annuitant. The tax treatment of these amounts depends on whether the Contractowner or the Annuitant dies before or after the selection of an Annuity Payout option.
Death prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option:
●
If the Beneficiary receives Death Benefits under an Annuity Payout option, they are taxed in the same manner as Annuity Payouts.
●
If the Beneficiary does not receive Death Benefits under an Annuity Payout option, they are taxed in the same manner as a withdrawal.
Death after the selection of an Annuity Payout option:
●
If Death Benefits are received in accordance with the existing Annuity Payout option following the death of a Contractowner who is not the Annuitant, they are excludible from income in the same manner as the Annuity Payout prior to the death of the Contractowner.
●
If Death Benefits are received in accordance with the existing Annuity Payout option following the death of the Annuitant (whether or not the Annuitant is also the Contractowner), the Death Benefits are excludible from income if they do not exceed the investment in the Contract not yet distributed from the Contract. All Annuity Payouts in excess of the investment in the Contract not previously received are includible in income.
●
If Death Benefits are received in a lump sum, the Code imposes tax on the amount of Death Benefits which exceeds the amount of Purchase Payments not previously received.
Additional Taxes Payable On Withdrawals, Surrenders, Or Annuity Payouts
The Code may impose a 10% additional tax on any distribution from your Contract which you must include in your gross income. The 10% additional tax does not apply if one of several exceptions exists. These exceptions include withdrawals, surrenders, or Annuity Payouts that:
●
you receive on or after you reach 59½,
●
you receive because you became disabled (as defined in the Code),
●
you receive from an immediate annuity,
●
a Beneficiary receives on or after your death, or
●
you receive as a series of substantially equal periodic payments based on your life or life expectancy (non-natural owners holding as agent for an individual do not qualify).
Unearned Income Medicare Contribution
Congress enacted the “Unearned Income Medicare Contribution” as a part of the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010. This tax, which affects individuals whose modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds, is a 3.8% tax on the lesser of (i) the individual's “unearned income,” or (ii) the dollar amount by which the individual's modified adjusted gross income exceeds the applicable threshold. Unearned income includes the taxable portion of distributions that you take from your annuity contract. If you take a distribution from your Contract that may be subject to the tax, we will include a Distribution Code “D” in Box 7 of the Form 1099-R issued to report the distribution. Please consult your tax advisor to determine whether your annuity distributions are subject to this tax.
Special Rules If You Own More Than One Annuity Contract
In certain circumstances, you must combine some or all of the nonqualified annuity contracts you own in order to determine the amount of an Annuity Payout, a surrender, or a withdrawal that you must include in income. For example, if you purchase two or more deferred annuity contracts from the same life insurance company (or its affiliates) during any calendar year, the Code treats all such contracts as one contract. Treating two or more contracts as one contract could affect the amount of a surrender, a withdrawal or an Annuity Payout that you must include in income and the amount that might be subject to the additional tax described previously.
Loans and Assignments
Except for certain qualified contracts, the Code treats any amount received as a loan under your Contract, and any assignment or pledge (or agreement to assign or pledge) of any portion of your Contract Value, as a withdrawal of such amount or portion.
Gifting A Contract
If you transfer ownership of your Contract to a person other than to your spouse (or to your former spouse incident to divorce), and receive a payment less than your Contract’s value, you will pay tax on your Contract Value to the extent it exceeds your investment in the Contract not previously received. The new owner’s investment in the Contract would then be increased to reflect the amount included in income.
55
Charges for Additional Benefits
Your Contract automatically includes a basic Death Benefit and may include other optional riders. Certain enhancements to the basic Death Benefit may also be available to you. The cost of the basic Death Benefit and any additional benefit are deducted from your Contract. It is possible that the tax law may treat all or a portion of the Death Benefit and other optional rider charges, if any, as a contract withdrawal.
Special Considerations for Same-Sex Spouses
In 2013, the U.S. Supreme Court held that same-sex spouses who are married under state law are treated as spouses for purposes of federal law. You are strongly encouraged to consult a tax advisor before electing spousal rights under the Contract.
Qualified Retirement Plans
We have designed the contracts for use in connection with certain types of retirement plans that receive favorable treatment under the Code. Contracts issued to or in connection with a qualified retirement plan are called “qualified contracts.” We issue contracts for use with various types of qualified retirement plans. The Federal income tax rules applicable to those plans are complex and varied. As a result, this prospectus does not attempt to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of qualified retirement plans. Persons planning to use the Contract in connection with a qualified retirement plan should obtain advice from a competent tax advisor.
Types of Qualified Contracts and Terms of Contracts
Qualified retirement plans may include the following:
●
Individual Retirement Accounts and Annuities (“Traditional IRAs”)
●
Roth IRAs
●
Traditional IRA that is part of a Simplified Employee Pension Plan (“SEP”)
●
SIMPLE 401(k) plans (Savings Incentive Matched Plan for Employees)
●
401(a) / (k) plans (qualified corporate employee pension and profit-sharing plans)
●
403(a) plans (qualified annuity plans)
●
403(b) plans (public school system and tax-exempt organization annuity plans)
●
H.R. 10 or Keogh Plans (self-employed individual plans)
●
457(b) plans (deferred compensation plans for state and local governments and tax-exempt organizations)
Our individual variable annuity products are not available for use with any of the foregoing qualified retirement plan accounts, with the exception of Traditional IRA, SEP IRA, and Roth IRA arrangements. Our individual variable annuity products are no longer available for purchase under a 403(b) plan, and we do not accept additional premiums or transfers to existing 403(b) contracts. We require confirmation from your 403(b) plan sponsor that surrenders, loans or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and decline requests that are not in compliance. We will defer processing payments you request until all information required under the Code has been received. By requesting a surrender, loan or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, your Contract, and transactions under the Contract and any other 403(b) contracts or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or record keeper, and other providers.
We will amend contracts to be used with a qualified retirement plan as generally necessary to conform to the Code’s requirements for the type of plan. However, the rights of a person to any qualified retirement plan benefits may be subject to the plan’s terms and conditions, regardless of the contract’s terms and conditions. In addition, we are not bound by the terms and conditions of qualified retirement plans to the extent such terms and conditions contradict the contract, unless we consent.
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE) Act of 2019
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE) Act (the “SECURE Act”) was enacted on December 20, 2019. The SECURE Act made a number of significant changes to the rules that apply to qualified retirement plans and IRA’s, including the following:
●
Eliminated the age 70½ limit for making contributions to an IRA. Beginning in 2020, an IRA owner can make contributions to his or her IRA at any age.
●
Changed the required minimum distribution rules that apply after the death of a participant or IRA owner.
●
Created the “Qualified Birth or Adoption” exception to the 10% additional tax on early distributions.
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement 2.0 (SECURE 2.0) Act of 2022
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE 2.0) Act (the “SECURE 2.0 Act”) was enacted on December 29, 2022. The SECURE 2.0 Act made specific changes to retirement plans and IRA’s, including:
●
Increased the required beginning date measuring age from age 72 to 73 for any participant or IRA owner who did not attain age
56
72 prior to January 1, 2023. As a result, required minimum distributions are generally required to begin by April 1st of the year following the year in which the participant or IRA owner reaches age 73.
●
Further increased the required beginning date measuring age to 75 by 2033.
●
Created exception to the 10% additional tax for distributions for domestic violence and emergencies.
●
Added provisions that permit rollover of 529 plan amounts to a Roth IRA for the beneficiary, within certain limits.
Tax Treatment of Qualified Contracts
The Federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans and qualified contracts vary with the type of plan and contract. For example:
●
Federal tax rules limit the amount of Purchase Payments or contributions that can be made, and the tax deduction or exclusion that may be allowed for the contributions. These limits vary depending on the type of qualified retirement plan and the participant’s specific circumstances (e.g., the participant’s compensation).
●
Minimum annual distributions are required under some qualified retirement plans once you reach age 73 or retire, if later as described below.
●
Loans are allowed under certain types of qualified retirement plans, but Federal income tax rules prohibit loans under other types of qualified retirement plans. For example, Federal income tax rules permit loans under some section 403(b) plans, but prohibit loans under Traditional and Roth IRAs. If allowed, loans are subject to a variety of limitations, including restrictions as to the loan amount, the loan’s duration, the rate of interest, and the manner of repayment. Your Contract or plan may not permit loans.
Please note that qualified retirement plans such as 403(b) plans, 401(k) plans and IRAs generally defer taxation of contributions and earnings until distribution. As such, an annuity does not provide any additional tax deferral benefit beyond the qualified retirement plan itself.
Tax Treatment of Payments
The Federal income tax rules generally include distributions from a qualified contract in the participant’s income as ordinary income. These taxable distributions will include contributions that were deductible or excludible from income. Thus, under many qualified contracts, the total amount received is included in income since a deduction or exclusion from income was taken for contributions to the contract. There are exceptions. For example, you do not include amounts received from a Roth IRA in income if certain conditions are satisfied.
Required Minimum Distributions
Under most qualified plans, you must begin receiving payments from the Contract in certain minimum amounts by your “required beginning date”. Prior to the SECURE 2.0 Act, the required beginning date was April 1 of the year following the year you attain age 72 or retired. If you did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023, then your required beginning date will be April 1st of the year following the year in which you attain age 73 or retire. If you own a traditional IRA, your required beginning date under prior law was April 1st of the year following the year in which you attained age 72. If you did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023, then your required beginning date will be April 1st of the year following the year in which you attain age 73. If you own a Roth IRA, you are not required to receive minimum distributions from your Roth IRA during your life.
Failure to comply with the minimum distribution rules applicable to certain qualified plans, such as Traditional IRAs, will result in the imposition of an excise tax. This excise tax is applied to the amount by which a required minimum distribution exceeds the actual distribution from the qualified plan.
Treasury regulations applicable to required minimum distributions include a rule that may impact the distribution method you have chosen and the amount of your distributions. Under these regulations, the presence of an enhanced Death Benefit, or other benefit which could provide additional value to your Contract, may require you to take additional distributions. An enhanced Death Benefit is any Death Benefit that has the potential to pay more than the Contract Value or a return of investment in the Contract. Annuity contracts inside Custodial or Trusteed IRAs will also be subject to these regulations. Please contact your tax advisor regarding any tax ramifications.
Additional Tax on Early Distributions from Qualified Retirement Plans
The Code may impose a 10% additional tax on an early distribution from a qualified contract that must be included in income. The Code does not impose the additional tax if one of several exceptions applies. The exceptions vary depending on the type of qualified contract you purchase. For example, in the case of an IRA, the 10% additional tax will not apply to any of the following withdrawals, surrenders, or Annuity Payouts:
●
Distribution received on or after the Annuitant reaches 59½,
●
Distribution received on or after the Annuitant’s death or because of the Annuitant’s disability (as defined in the Code),
●
Distribution received as a series of substantially equal periodic payments based on the Annuitant’s life (or life expectancy),
●
Distribution received as reimbursement for certain amounts paid for medical care, or
57
●
Distribution received for a “qualified birth or adoption” event.
These exceptions, as well as certain others not described here, generally apply to taxable distributions from other qualified retirement plans. However, the specific requirements of the exception may vary.
Unearned Income Medicare Contribution
Congress enacted the “Unearned Income Medicare Contribution” as a part of the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010. This tax affects individuals whose modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds, is a 3.8% tax on the lesser of (i) the individual’s “unearned income,” or (ii) the dollar amount by which the individual’s modified adjusted gross income exceeds the applicable threshold. Distributions that you take from your Contract are not included in the calculation of unearned income because your Contract is a qualified plan contract. However, the amount of any such distribution is included in determining whether you exceed the modified adjusted gross income threshold. Please consult your tax advisor to determine whether your annuity distributions are subject to this tax.
Transfers and Direct Rollovers
As a result of the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001 (EGTRRA), you may be able to move funds between different types of qualified plans, such as 403(b) and 457(b) governmental plans, by means of a rollover or transfer. You may be able to rollover or transfer amounts between qualified plans and traditional IRAs. These rules do not apply to Roth IRAs and 457(b) non-governmental tax-exempt plans. There are special rules that apply to rollovers, direct rollovers and transfers (including rollovers or transfers of after-tax amounts). If the applicable rules are not followed, you may incur adverse Federal income tax consequences, including paying taxes which you might not otherwise have had to pay. Before we send a rollover distribution, we will provide a notice explaining tax withholding requirements (see Federal Income Tax Withholding). We are not required to send you such notice for your IRA. You should always consult your tax advisor before you move or attempt to move any funds.
The IRS issued Announcement 2014-32 confirming its intent to apply the one-rollover-per-year limitation of 408(d)(3)(B) on an aggregate basis to all IRAs that an individual owns. This means that an individual cannot make a tax-free IRA-to-IRA rollover if he or she has made such a rollover involving any of the individual’s IRAs in the current tax year. If an intended rollover does not qualify for tax-free rollover treatment, contributions to your IRA may constitute excess contributions that may exceed contribution limits. This one-rollover-per-year limitation does not apply to direct trustee-to-trustee transfers.
Direct Conversions and Recharacterizations
The Pension Protection Act of 2006 (PPA) permits direct conversions from certain qualified, retirement, 403(b) or 457(b) plans to Roth IRAs (effective for distributions after 2007). You are also permitted to recharacterize your traditional IRA contribution as a Roth IRA contribution, and to recharacterize your Roth IRA contribution as a traditional IRA contribution. The deadline for the recharacterization is the due date (including extensions) for your individual income tax return for the year in which the contribution was made. Upon recharacterization, you are treated as having made the contribution originally to the second IRA account. The recharacterization does not count toward the one-rollover-per-year limitation described above.
Effective for tax years beginning after December 31, 2017, pursuant to the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act (Pub. L. No. 115-97), recharacterizations are no longer allowed in the case of a conversion from a non-Roth account or annuity to a Roth IRA. This limitation applies to conversions made from pre-tax accounts under an IRA, qualified retirement plan, 403(b) plan, or 457(b) plan. Roth IRA conversions made in 2017 may be recharacterized as a contribution to a traditional IRA if the recharacterization is completed by October 15, 2018.
There are special rules that apply to conversions and recharacterizations, and if they are not followed, you may incur adverse Federal income tax consequences. You should consult your tax advisor before completing a conversion or recharacterization.
Death Benefit and IRAs
Pursuant to Treasury regulations, IRAs may not invest in life insurance contracts. We do not believe that these regulations prohibit the Death Benefit from being provided under the Contract when we issue the Contract as a Traditional or Roth IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that the presence of the Death Benefit under a Contract issued as a Traditional or Roth IRA could result in increased taxes to you. Certain Death Benefit options may not be available for all of our products.
Federal Income Tax Withholding
We will withhold and remit to the IRS a part of the taxable portion of each distribution made under a Contract unless you notify us in writing prior to the distribution that tax is not to be withheld. In certain circumstances, Federal income tax rules may require us to withhold tax. At the time a withdrawal, surrender, or Annuity Payout is requested, we will give you an explanation of the withholding requirements.
Certain payments from your Contract may be considered eligible rollover distributions (even if such payments are not being rolled over). Such distributions may be subject to special tax withholding requirements. The Federal income tax withholding rules require that we withhold 20% of the eligible rollover distribution from the payment amount, unless you elect to have the amount directly
58
transferred to certain qualified plans or contracts. The IRS requires that tax be withheld, even if you have requested otherwise. Such tax withholding requirements are generally applicable to 401(a), 403(a) or (b), HR 10, and 457(b) governmental plans and contracts used in connection with these types of plans.
Our Tax Status
Under the Code, we are not required to pay tax on investment income and realized capital gains of the VAA. We do not expect that we will incur any Federal income tax liability on the income and gains earned by the VAA. However, the Company does expect, to the extent permitted under the Code, to claim the benefit of the foreign tax credit as the owner of the assets of the VAA. Therefore, we do not impose a charge for Federal income taxes. If there are any changes in the Code that require us to pay tax on some or all of the income and gains earned by the VAA, we may impose a charge against the VAA to pay the taxes.
Changes in the Law
The above discussion is based on the Code, related regulations, and interpretations existing on the date of this prospectus. However, Congress, the IRS, and the courts may modify these authorities, sometimes retroactively.
Additional Information
Voting Rights
As required by law, we will vote the fund shares held in the VAA at meetings of the shareholders of the funds. The voting will be done according to the instructions of Contractowners who have interests in any Subaccounts which invest in classes of the funds. If the 1940 Act or any regulation under it should be amended or if present interpretations should change, and if as a result we determine that we are permitted to vote the fund shares in our own right, we may elect to do so.
The number of votes which you have the right to cast will be determined by applying your percentage interest in a Subaccount to the total number of votes attributable to the Subaccount. In determining the number of votes, fractional shares will be recognized.
Each underlying fund is subject to the laws of the state in which it is organized concerning, among other things, the matters which are subject to a shareholder vote, the number of shares which must be present in person or by proxy at a meeting of shareholders (a “quorum”), and the percentage of such shares present in person or by proxy which must vote in favor of matters presented. Because shares of the underlying fund held in the VAA are owned by us, and because under the 1940 Act we will vote all such shares in the same proportion as the voting instructions which we receive, it is important that each Contractowner provide their voting instructions to us. For funds un-affiliated with Lincoln, even though Contractowners may choose not to provide voting instruction, the shares of a fund to which such Contractowners would have been entitled to provide voting instruction will be voted by us in the same proportion as the voting instruction which we actually receive. For funds affiliated with Lincoln, shares of a fund to which such Contractowners would have been entitled to provide voting instruction will, once we receive a sufficient number of instructions we deem appropriate to ensure a fair representation of Contractowners eligible to vote, be voted by us in the same proportion as the voting instruction which we actually receive. As a result, the instruction of a small number of Contractowners could determine the outcome of matters subject to shareholder vote. All shares voted by us will be counted when the underlying fund determines whether any requirement for a minimum number of shares be present at such a meeting to satisfy a quorum requirement has been met. Voting instructions to abstain on any item to be voted on will be applied proportionately to reduce the number of votes eligible to be cast.
Whenever a shareholders meeting is called, we will provide or make available to each person having a voting interest in a Subaccount proxy voting material, reports and other materials relating to the funds. Since the funds engage in shared funding, other persons or entities besides Lincoln Life may vote fund shares. See Investments of the Variable Annuity Account.
Return Privilege
Within the free-look period after you receive the Contract, you may cancel it for any reason by sending us a letter of instruction, indicating your intent to exercise the free-look provision. A Contract canceled under this provision will be void. Except as explained in the following paragraph, we will return the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date on which we receive the cancellation request, plus any premium taxes plus mortality and expense risk charges and administrative charges proportionately attributable to the Bonus Credits, less any Bonus Credits paid into the Contract by us. In addition, if the Contract Value on the date of cancellation is less than the sum of Purchase Payments minus withdrawals, we will also return both the investment loss and fund management fees, each in an amount that is proportionately attributable to the Bonus Credits. No surrender charges or Interest Adjustment will apply. A purchaser who participates in the VAA is subject to the risk of a market loss on the Contract Value, excluding the Bonus Credits during the free-look period.
For contracts written in those states whose laws require that we assume this market risk during the free-look period, a Contract may be canceled, subject to the conditions explained before, except that we will return the greater of the Purchase Payment(s) or Contract
59
Value as of the Valuation Date we receive the cancellation request, plus any premium taxes that had been deducted. IRA purchasers will also receive the greater of Purchase Payments or Contract Value as of the Valuation Date on which we receive the cancellation request.
State Regulation
As a life insurance company organized and operated under Indiana law, we are subject to provisions governing life insurers and to regulation by the Indiana Commissioner of Insurance. Our books and accounts are subject to review and examination by the Indiana Department of Insurance at all times. A full examination of our operations is conducted by that Department at least every five years.
Records and Reports
As presently required by the 1940 Act and applicable regulations, we are responsible for maintaining all records and accounts relating to the VAA. We have entered into an agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company, 2323 Grand Boulevard, 5th Floor, Kansas City, MO 64108, to provide accounting services to the VAA. We will mail to you, at your last known address of record at the Home Office, at least semi-annually after the first Contract Year, reports containing information required by that Act or any other applicable law or regulation.
A written (or electronic, if elected) confirmation of each transaction will be provided to you on the next Valuation Date, except for the following transactions, which are mailed quarterly:
●
deduction of any account fee or rider charges;
●
crediting of persistency credits, if applicable;
●
any rebalancing event under Asset Allocation Models, Investment Requirements or the portfolio rebalancing service;
●
any transfer or withdrawal under any applicable additional service: dollar cost averaging, AWS, or the cross-reinvestment service; and
●
Regular Income Payments from i4LIFE® Advantage.
Other Information
You may elect to receive your prospectus, prospectus supplements, quarterly statements, and annual and semiannual reports electronically over the Internet, if you have an e-mail account and access to an Internet browser. Once you select eDelivery, via the Internet Service Center, all documents available in electronic format will no longer be sent to you in hard copy. You will receive an e-mail notification when the documents become available online. It is your responsibility to provide us with your current e-mail address. You can resume paper mailings at any time without cost, by updating your profile at the Internet Service Center, or contacting us. To learn more about this service, please log on to www.LincolnFinancial.com, select service centers and continue on through the Internet Service Center.
Special Arrangements
At times, we may offer variations of the contracts described in this prospectus to existing owners as part of an exchange program. Contracts purchased through this exchange offer may impose different fees and expenses and provide certain additional benefits from those described in this prospectus.
Legal Proceedings
In the ordinary course of its business and otherwise, the Company and its subsidiaries or its separate accounts and Principal Underwriter may become or are involved in various pending or threatened regulatory or legal proceedings, including purported class actions, arising from the conduct of its business. In some instances, the proceedings include claims for unspecified or substantial punitive damages and similar types of relief in addition to amounts for alleged contractual liability or requests for equitable relief.
After consultation with legal counsel and a review of available facts, it is management’s opinion that the proceedings, after consideration of any reserves and rights to indemnification, ultimately will be resolved without any material adverse effect on the consolidated financial position of the Company and its subsidiaries, or the financial position of its separate accounts or Principal Underwriter. However, given the large and indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these proceedings and the inherent difficulty in predicting the outcome of such proceedings, it is reasonably possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could be material to the Company’s operating results for any particular reporting period.
Please refer to the Statement of Additional Information for possible additional information regarding legal proceedings.
60
(This page intentionally left blank)
(This page intentionally left blank)
61
Appendix A — Funds Available Under The Contract
The following is a list of funds currently available under the Contract. Depending on the optional benefits you choose, you may not be able to invest in certain funds. Current performance of the Subaccounts can be found at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. More information about the funds is available in the prospectuses for the Funds, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. You can also request this information and current fund performance at no cost by calling 1-800-942-5500 or by sending an email request to [email protected].
The current expenses and performance information below reflects fees and expenses of the Fund, but do not reflect the other fees and expenses that your Contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these other charges were included. Each fund’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance. 
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2024)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
The balanced accomplishment of three
objectives: long-term growth of capital,
conservation of principal and current
income.
American Funds® IS American Funds
Global Balanced Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.76%2
6.58%
4.84%
5.90%
To provide current income and
preservation of capital.
American Funds® IS American Funds
Mortgage Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.56%2
0.68%
-0.05%
1.03%
To provide investors with a high level of
current income; capital appreciation is
the secondary objective.
American Funds® IS American High-
Income Trust - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.58%2
9.67%
5.54%
5.32%
High total return (including income and
capital gains) consistent with
preservation of capital over the long
term.
American Funds® IS Asset Allocation
Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.54%
16.44%
8.32%
8.32%
Seeks to provide a level of current
income that exceeds the average yield
on U.S. stocks generally and to provide
a growing stream of income over the
years.
American Funds® IS Capital Income
Builder - Class 4
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.78%2
9.93%
5.75%
5.17%
To provide, over the long term, with a
high level of total return consistent with
prudent investment management.
American Funds® IS Capital World Bond
Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.73%
-3.04%
-2.41%
-0.09%
Long-term growth of capital while
providing current income.
American Funds® IS Capital World
Growth and Income Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.67%2
14.00%
7.29%
8.45%
Long-term growth of capital.
American Funds® IS Global Growth
Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.66%2
13.68%
9.76%
10.74%
A-1
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2024)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Long-term capital growth.
American Funds® IS Global Small
Capitalization Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.90%2
2.33%
3.01%
5.81%
Growth of capital.
American Funds® IS Growth Fund -
Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.59%
31.61%
18.83%
16.58%
Long-term growth of capital and income.
American Funds® IS Growth-Income
Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.53%
24.23%
13.01%
12.20%
Long-term growth of capital.
American Funds® IS International Fund -
Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.78%
3.16%
1.23%
4.01%
Long-term growth of capital while
providing current income.
American Funds® IS International
Growth and Income Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.81%
3.48%
2.55%
3.99%
To provide high total return (including
income and capital gains) consistent
with preservation of capital over the long
term while seeking to manage volatility
and provide downside protection. A fund
of funds.
American Funds® IS Managed Risk
Asset Allocation Fund - Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.90%
14.63%
5.30%
5.88%
To provide growth of capital while
seeking to manage volatility and provide
downside protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds® IS Managed Risk
Growth Fund - Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.94%
23.50%
11.30%
10.42%
To achieve long-term growth of capital
and income while seeking to manage
volatility and provide downside
protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds® IS Managed Risk
Growth-Income Fund - Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.88%
17.69%
7.39%
7.43%
To provide long-term growth of capital
while seeking to manage volatility and
provide downside protection. A fund of
funds.
American Funds® IS Managed Risk
International Fund - Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
1.10%2
-0.45%
-2.52%
0.78%
To produce income and to provide an
opportunity for growth of principal
consistent with sound common stock
investing while seeking to manage
volatility and provide downside
protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds® IS Managed Risk
Washington Mutual Investors Fund -
Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.88%
13.99%
5.61%
5.28%
A-2
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2024)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Long-term capital appreciation.
American Funds® IS New World Fund -
Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.82%2
6.55%
4.54%
6.22%
Long-term growth of capital. A fund of
funds.
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series -
American Funds Global Growth Portfolio
- Class 4
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.96%
13.64%
8.13%
N/A
To provide long-term growth of capital
while providing current income. A fund
of funds.
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series -
American Funds Growth and Income
Portfolio - Class 4
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.82%
12.37%
7.19%
N/A
High total return (including income and
capital gains) consistent with
preservation of capital over the long
term while seeking to manage volatility
and provide downside protection. A fund
of funds.
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series -
American Funds Managed Risk Global
Allocation Portfolio - Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
1.03%
8.05%
2.31%
N/A
Long-term growth of capital and current
income while seeking to manage
volatility and provide downside
protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series -
American Funds Managed Risk Growth
and Income Portfolio - Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.91%
12.26%
4.39%
N/A
Long-term growth of capital while
seeking to manage volatility and provide
downside protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series -
American Funds Managed Risk Growth
Portfolio - Class P2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.95%
13.84%
5.74%
N/A
To provide as high a level of current
income as is consistent with the
preservation of capital.
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of
America - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.48%2
1.16%
0.32%
1.67%
To provide a high level of current income
consistent with prudent investment risk
and preservation of capital.
American Funds® IS U.S. Government
Securities Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.50%2
0.75%
0.14%
1.10%
To provide the investors with current
income, consistent with the maturity and
quality standards applicable to the fund,
and preservation of capital and liquidity.
American Funds® IS Ultra-Short Bond
Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.56%
4.89%
2.01%
1.28%
A-3
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2024)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
To produce income and to provide an
opportunity for growth of principal
consistent with sound common stock
investing.
American Funds® IS Washington Mutual
Investors Fund - Class 2
advised by Capital Research and
Management Company
0.50%2
19.14%
12.18%
10.26%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with an emphasis on growth of capital. A
fund of funds.
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
- Service Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.92%2
10.74%
6.41%
6.24%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital. A
fund of funds.
LVIP American Global Balanced
Allocation Managed Risk Fund - Service
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.94%
9.49%
4.19%
4.56%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with a greater emphasis on growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation
Managed Risk Fund - Service Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.98%
11.87%
4.88%
5.08%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with a greater emphasis on growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund -
Service Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.94%2
11.61%
6.76%
6.74%
A high level of current income with
some consideration given to growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund -
Service Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.92%2
8.09%
4.63%
4.73%
Current income, consistent with the
preservation of capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Preservation Fund -
Service Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.86%2
2.88%
0.75%
1.11%
1
The name of the adviser or sub-adviser is not listed if the name is incorporated into the name of the fund or the fund company.
2
This fund is subject to an expense reimbursement or fee waiver arrangement. As a result, this fund’s annual expenses reflect temporary expense reductions. See the fund prospectus for additional information.
A-4
Appendix B — Investment Requirements
If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be subject to Investment Requirements. This requirement means you will be limited in your choice of Subaccount investments and in how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. This also means you will not be able to allocate Contract Value to all of the Subaccounts that are available to Contractowners who have not elected a Living Benefit Rider. We impose Investment Requirements to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under a Living Benefit Rider.
If you elect a Living Benefit Rider, Investment Requirements apply whether you purchase the rider at Contract issue or add it to an existing Contract. The Living Benefit Rider you purchase and the date of purchase will determine which Investment Requirements Option will apply to your Contract. See Option 1, Option 2, and Option 3 below. Currently, if you purchase i4LIFE® without Guaranteed Income Benefit, you will not be subject to any Investment Requirements, although we reserve the right to impose Investment Requirements for this rider in the future. If we do exercise our right to do so, you will have to reallocate your Account Value subject to such requirements.
Certain of the underlying funds that are included in the Investment Requirements, including funds managed by an adviser affiliated with us, employ risk management strategies that are intended to control the funds’ overall volatility, and for some funds, to also reduce the downside exposure of the funds during significant market downturns.
These funds are included under Investment Requirements in part because the reduction in volatility helps us to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under a Living Benefit Rider. At the same time, risk management strategies in periods of high market volatility or other market conditions, could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and, in turn, the value of any guaranteed benefit that is tied to investment performance. You should consult your registered representative to determine whether these funds align with your investment objectives. For more information about the funds and the investment strategies they employ, please refer to the funds’ current prospectuses. Fund prospectuses are available by contacting us.
Under each option, we have divided the Subaccounts of your Contract into groups and have specified the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value that must be in each group at the time you purchased the rider (or when the rider Investment Requirements are enforced, if later). In addition, depending on when you purchased your Contract, you may allocate your Contract Value and Purchase Payments in accordance with certain asset allocation models, as noted below. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. Some investment options are not available to you if you purchase certain riders. The Investment Requirements may not be consistent with an aggressive investment strategy. You should consult with your registered representative to determine if the Investment Requirements are consistent with your investment objectives.
The chart below is provided to help you determine which option of Investment Requirements, if any, applies to the Living Benefit Rider you purchased. If you do not elect a Living Benefit Rider, the Investment Requirements will not apply to your Contract. Different Investment Requirements may apply if you terminate one rider and elect another rider. 
If you elect...
and the date of election is...
you will be subject to
Investment Requirements
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit
On or after October 3, 2016
Option 3
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage
February 19, 2008 through January 19, 2009
On or after January 20, 2009
Option 2
Option 3
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage
Prior to April 10, 2006
April 10, 2006 through January 19, 2009
On or after January 20, 2009
N/A
Option 1
Option 3
4LATER® Advantage
April 10, 2006 through January 19, 2009
On or after January 20, 2009
Option 1
Option 3
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.1)
Prior to April 10, 2006
On or after April 10, 2006
N/A
Option 1
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.2)
April 10, 2006 through January 19, 2009
On or after January 20, 2009
Option 1
Option 3
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.3)
October 6, 2008 through January 19, 2009
On or after January 20, 2009
Option 2
Option 3
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.4)
On or after November 15, 2010
Option 3
 
B-1
Investment Requirements – Option 1
No more than 35% of your Contract Value (includes Account Value if i4LIFE® Advantage is in effect) can be invested in the following Subaccounts (“Limited Subaccounts”) (Note: not all Subaccounts are available with all contracts):
●
American Funds® IS American High-Income Trust
●
American Funds® IS Capital Income Builder
●
American Funds® IS Capital World Growth and Income Fund
●
American Funds® IS Global Growth Fund
●
American Funds® IS Global Small Capitalization Fund
●
American Funds® IS International Fund
●
American Funds® IS International Growth and Income Fund
●
American Funds® IS New World Fund
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Global Growth Portfolio
All other Subaccounts will be referred to as “Non-Limited Subaccounts”.
You can select the percentages of Contract Value, if any, allocated to the Limited Subaccounts, but the cumulative total investment in all the Limited Subaccounts cannot exceed 35% of the total Contract Value. On each quarterly anniversary of the effective date of the rider, if the Contract Value in the Limited Subaccounts exceeds 35%, Lincoln will rebalance your Contract Value so that the Contract Value in the Limited Subaccounts is 30%. If you are enrolled in portfolio rebalancing, the cumulative total investment in all the Limited Subaccounts cannot exceed 35% of total Contract Value. If your current portfolio rebalancing does not adhere to this requirement, your portfolio rebalancing program will be terminated.
If rebalancing is required, the Contract Value in excess of 30% will be removed from the Limited Subaccounts on a pro rata basis and invested in the remaining Non-Limited Subaccounts on a pro rata basis according to the Contract Value percentages in the Non-Limited Subaccounts at the time of the reallocation. If there is no Contract Value in the Non-Limited Subaccounts at that time, portfolio rebalancing will be paused until updated allocation instructions are received from you. We will provide you with notice of such change. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement.
We may move Subaccounts on or off the Limited or Non-Limited Subaccount list, exclude Subaccounts and asset allocation models from being available for investment, change the number of Limited Subaccount groups, change the percentages of Contract Value allowed in the Limited or Non-Limited Subaccounts or change the frequency of the Contract Value rebalancing, at any time, in our sole discretion. We will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change. We may make such modifications at any time when we believe the modifications are necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. Our decision to make modifications will be based on several factors including the general market conditions and the style and investment objectives of the Subaccount investments.
At the time you receive notice of a change or when you are notified that we will begin enforcing the Investment Requirements, you may:
1.
submit your own reallocation instructions for the Contract Value in excess of 35% in the Limited Subaccounts; or
2.
take no action and be subject to the quarterly rebalancing as described above; or
3.
terminate the applicable rider immediately, without waiting for a termination event if you do not wish to be subject to these Investment Requirements.
Investment Requirements – Option 2
You can select the percentages of Contract Value (includes Account Value if i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect) to allocate to individual Subaccounts within each group, but the total investment for all Subaccounts in a group must comply with the specified minimum or maximum percentages for that group.
In accordance with these Investment Requirements, you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option under your Contract and thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a periodic basis. On each quarterly anniversary of the effective date of the rider, we will rebalance your Contract Value, proportionately, based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Any reallocation of Contract Value among the Subaccounts made by you prior to a rebalancing date will become your allocation instructions for rebalancing purposes. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. We reserve the right to change the rebalancing frequency, at any time, in our sole discretion. We will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change in frequency. If we rebalance Contract Value from the Subaccounts and your allocation instructions do not comply with the Investment Requirements, portfolio rebalancing will be paused, and any subsequent transfer requests will be considered not in Good Order until updated allocation instructions are received. These investments will become your allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise.
We may change the list of Subaccounts in a group, change the number of groups, change the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value allowed in a group or change the investment options that are or are not available to you, at any time, in our sole discretion. We will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change. We may make such modifications at any time when we believe the modifications are necessary to protect our ability to provide the
B-2
guarantees under these riders. Our decision to make modifications will be based on several factors including the general market conditions and the style and investment objectives of the Subaccount investments.
At the time you receive notice of a change to the Investment Requirements, you may:
1.
submit your own reallocation instructions for the Contract Value, before the effective date specified in the notice, so that the Investment Requirements are satisfied;
2.
if you take no action, such changes will apply only to additional Purchase Payments or to future transfers of Contract Value. You will not be required to change allocations to existing Subaccounts, but you will not be allowed to add money, by either an additional Purchase Payment or a contract transfer, in excess of the new percentage applicable to a Subaccount or Subaccount group. This does not apply to Subaccounts added to Investment Requirements on or after June 30, 2009. For Subaccounts added to Investment Requirements on or after June 30, 2009, you may be subject to rebalancing as described above. If this results in a change to your allocation instructions, then these will be your new allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise; or
3.
terminate the applicable rider immediately, without waiting for a termination event if you do not wish to be subject to the new terms of the Investment Requirements.
At this time, the Subaccount groups are as follows: 
Group 1
Investments must be at least 25% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 75% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 3
Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract
Value or Account Value
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage
Fund
American Funds® IS American High-Income
Trust
American Funds® IS Capital World Bond Fund
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities
Fund
LVIP American Preservation Fund
All other investment options except as discussed
below.
No Subaccounts at this time.
The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.
To satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts on the following list; however, if you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value to or among these Subaccounts, then these Subaccounts will be considered as part of Group 1 or 2 above, as applicable, and you will be subject to the Group 1 or 2 restrictions.
●
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage Fund
●
American Funds® IS American High-Income Trust
●
American Funds® IS Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Capital World Bond Fund
●
American Funds® IS Global Balanced Fund
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
●
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities Fund
●
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
●
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
●
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Preservation Fund
To satisfy these Investment Requirements, Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value may be allocated in accordance with certain asset allocation models, made available to you by your broker dealer. At this time, 100% of the Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value can be allocated to one of the following models: American Legacy Fundamental Growth and Income Model, American Legacy Fundamental Equity Growth Model, American Legacy Fundamental Balanced Model, or American Legacy Fundamental Income Model. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model available in your Contract that meets the Investment Requirements or reallocate Contract Value among Group 1 or Group 2 Subaccounts as described above. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider.
B-3
If you purchased the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus rider before January 20, 2009, your only investment options until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary are to allocate 100% of your Contract Value to the American Funds® IS Asset Allocation Fund (a Subaccount), the American Funds® IS Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund or the LVIP American Income Allocation Fund, or to one of these asset allocation models: the American Legacy Fundamental Balanced Model or the American Legacy Fundamental Income Model.
Investment Requirements – Option 3
For all Living Benefit Riders, you can select the percentages of Contract Value (or Account Value if i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect) to allocate to individual Subaccounts within each group, but the total investment for all Subaccounts within the group must comply with the specified minimum or maximum percentages for that group.
You must hold the rider for a minimum period of time after election (the minimum time is specified under the Termination section of each rider). During this time, you will be required to adhere to the Investment Requirements. After this time, failure to adhere to the Investment Requirements will result in termination of the rider.
Certain Living Benefit Riders guarantee you the right to transition to a version of the i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit even if that version is no longer available for purchase. If you transition to i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Investment Requirements under your Prior Living Benefit Rider continue to apply. See i4LIFE® Advantage – i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.
If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit), you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option under your Contract and thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a periodic basis. On each quarterly anniversary of the effective date of the rider, we will rebalance your Contract Value, proportionately, based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Any reallocation of Contract Value among the Subaccounts made by you prior to a rebalancing date will become your allocation instructions for rebalancing purposes. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. If we rebalance Contract Value from the Subaccounts and your allocation instructions do not comply with the Investment Requirements, portfolio rebalancing will be paused, and any subsequent transfer requests will be considered not in Good Order until updated allocation instructions are received. These investments will become your allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise.
For certain Living Benefit Riders, the Subaccounts of your Contract are divided into groups and have specified minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value that must be in each group at the time you purchase the rider. Please review the Investment Requirements below to determine which Investment Requirements apply to your rider. You can select the percentages of Contract Value to allocate to individual Subaccounts within each group, but the total investment for all Subaccounts within the group must comply with the specified minimum or maximum percentages for that group. We may change the list of Subaccounts in a group, change the number of groups, change the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value allowed in a group, change the investment options that are or are not available to you, or change the rebalancing frequency at any time in our sole discretion. For other Living Benefit Riders, we may only make certain Subaccounts available to you, which are listed below.
For all Living Benefit Riders, we may add or remove Subaccounts at any time in our sole discretion. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change. We may make such modifications at any time when we believe the modifications are necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. Our decision to make modifications will be based on several factors including the general market conditions and the style and investment objectives of the subaccount investments.
At the time you receive notice of a change to the Investment Requirements, you may:
1.
submit your own reallocation instructions for the Contract Value, before the effective date specified in the notice, so that the Investment Requirements are satisfied; or
2.
take no action and be subject to the quarterly rebalancing as described above. If this results in a change to your allocation instructions, then these will be your new allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise; or
3.
terminate the applicable rider immediately, without waiting for a termination event, if you do not wish to be subject to these Investment Requirements.
Option 3 – Investment Requirements for elections of i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit riders purchased on or after August 19, 2025. If you elected i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit on or after August 19, 2025, you must currently allocate your Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 
Group 1
Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage Fund
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities Fund
American Funds® IS American High-Income Trust
American Funds® IS Asset Allocation Fund
American Funds® IS Capital Income Builder
B-4
Group 1
Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value
LVIP American Preservation Fund
American Funds® IS Capital World Growth and Income Fund
American Funds® IS Global Balanced Fund
American Funds® IS Global Growth Fund
American Funds® IS American Funds Global Growth Portfolio
American Funds® IS American Funds Growth and Income Portfolio
American Funds® IS Growth Fund
American Funds® IS Growth-Income Fund
American Funds® IS International Fund
American Funds® IS International Growth and Income Fund
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series –American Managed Risk Global
Allocation Portfolio
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth
and Income Portfolio
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth
Portfolio
American Funds® IS Ultra-Short Bond Fund
American Funds® IS Washington Mutual Investors Fund
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.
As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.
●
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage Fund
●
American Funds® IS Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Global Balanced Fund
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Growth and Income Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
●
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities Fund
●
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
●
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
●
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Preservation Fund
The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.
Additionally, Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value may be allocated in accordance with certain asset allocation models made available to you by your broker-dealer. If so, currently 100% of the Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value can be allocated to one of the following models, if available:
●
American Funds Balanced Model Portfolio
●
American Funds Conservative Model Portfolio
●
American Funds Asset Allocation Fund & American Funds U.S. Government/AAA-Rated Securities Fund Model
●
American Funds IS TRICAP Global Moderate Growth Portfolio
●
American Funds IS TRICAP Moderate Growth Portfolio
You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model available in your Contract that meets the Investment Requirements or reallocate Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value according to the Investment Requirements listed above. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. We may exclude an asset allocation model from being available for investment at any time, in our sole discretion. You will be notified prior to the date of such a change.
B-5
Option 3 – Investment Requirements for elections of i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit riders purchased prior to August 19, 2025. If you elected i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit prior to August 19, 2025, you must currently allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts.
●
American Funds® IS Capital Income Builder*
●
American Funds® IS Global Balanced Fund
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Growth Fund*
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Growth-Income Fund*
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk International Fund*
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Washington Mutual Investors Fund
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Global Growth Portfolio*
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Growth and Income Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth Portfolio
●
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
●
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
●
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Preservation Fund
*These funds are only available for riders elected on or after May 21, 2018.
The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.
As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, contracts that purchase i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit prior to January 9, 2017, may allocate 100% of your Account Value among the American Funds Asset Allocation Fund (85%) and the American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund (15%).
Contracts that purchase i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit on or after January 9, 2017, may allocate in accordance with certain asset allocation models made available to you by your broker-dealer. If so, currently 100% of the Account Value can be allocated to one of the following models, if available:
●
American Funds Asset Allocation Fund & American Funds U.S. Government/AAA-Rated Securities Fund
●
American Funds IS TRICAP Moderate Growth Portfolio
●
American Funds IS TRICAP Global Moderate Growth Portfolio
If you terminate the asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. We may exclude an asset allocation model from being available for investment at any time, in our sole discretion. You will be notified prior to the date of such a change.
B-6
Option 3 – Investment Requirements for elections of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) riders purchase on or after October 5, 2015. For i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) riders purchased on or after October 5, 2015, you must currently allocate your Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 
Group 1
Investments must be at least 30% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 70% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 3
Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract
Value or Account Value
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage
Fund
American Funds® IS Capital World Bond Fund
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities
Fund
LVIP American Preservation Fund
American Funds® IS American High-Income
Trust
American Funds® IS Asset Allocation Fund
American Funds® IS Capital Income Builder
American Funds® IS Capital World Growth and
Income Fund
American Funds® IS Global Balanced Fund
American Funds® IS Global Growth Fund
American Funds® IS Growth Fund
American Funds® IS Growth-Income Fund
American Funds® IS International Fund
American Funds® IS International Growth and
Income Fund
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American
Funds Global Growth Portfolio
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American
Funds Growth and Income Portfolio
American Funds® IS Ultra-Short Bond Fund
American Funds® IS Washington Mutual
Investors Fund
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
American Funds® IS Global Small Capitalization
Fund
American Funds® IS New World Fund
The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.
As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.
●
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage Fund
●
American Funds® IS Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Capital World Bond Fund
●
American Funds® IS Global Balanced Fund
●
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
●
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities Fund
●
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Preservation Fund
The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.
Option 3 – Investment Requirements for all other Living Benefit Riders. You must currently allocate your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 
Group 1
Investments must be at least 30% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 70% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 3
Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract
Value or Account Value
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage
Fund
American Funds® IS Capital World Bond Fund
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities
Fund
LVIP American Preservation Fund
All other Subaccounts, except as described
below.
No Subaccounts at this time.
The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.
As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.
B-7
●
American Funds® IS American Funds Mortgage Fund
●
American Funds® IS Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Capital World Bond Fund
●
American Funds® IS Global Balanced Fund
●
American Funds® IS Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS Portfolio Series – American Funds Managed Risk Growth Portfolio
●
American Funds® IS The Bond Fund of America
●
American Funds® IS U.S. Government Securities Fund
●
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
●
LVIP American Preservation Fund
●
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
●
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
To satisfy these Investment Requirements, Contract Value may be allocated in accordance with certain asset allocation models depending on when you purchased your Contract, made available to you by your broker-dealer. If so, currently 100% of the Contract Value can be allocated to one of the following models: American Legacy Fundamental Equity Growth Model, American Legacy Fundamental Balanced Model, or American Legacy Fundamental Income Model. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model available in your Contract that meets the Investment Requirements or reallocate Contract Value among Group 1 or Group 2 Subaccounts as described above. These models are not available for contracts issued on or after November 15, 2010. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider.
If you purchased the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus rider on or after January 20, 2009, your only investment options until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary are to allocate 100% of your Contract Value to the LVIP American Income Allocation Fund subaccount or the American Legacy Fundamental Income Model. This model is not available for contracts purchased on or after November 15, 2010.
B-8
Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders
The Living Benefit Riders described in this Appendix are unavailable for purchase as of June 30, 2009. This Appendix contains important information for Contractowners who purchased their contract and one of the following Living Benefit Riders prior to June 30, 2009.
i4LIFE® Advantage and the Guaranteed Income Benefit are described in detail in the prospectus (see Living Benefit Riders).
Charges and Deductions for Discontinued Living Benefit Riders
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Fees. There is a fee associated with this rider as long as the rider is in effect.
The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of (a) the last Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the Benefit Year anniversary following any deposit where cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000. If the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus was purchased, an additional 0.15% is added to your rider fee. See Appendix C – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage – Protected Income Base for a description of the calculation of the Protected Income Base.
The fee is based on the Guaranteed Amount as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups, 5% Enhancements, and the 200% step-up and decreased for withdrawals. We will deduct the cost of this rider from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis, with the first deduction occurring on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the effective date of the rider. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount of the Contract on the Valuation Date the protected lifetime income fee is assessed. For riders purchased on and after March 2, 2009, the charge is also deducted in proportion to the value in the fixed account used for dollar cost averaging purposes. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Guaranteed Amount increases or decreases, because the fee is based on the Guaranteed Amount.
Since the Account Value Step-up could increase your Guaranteed Amount every Benefit Year (if all conditions are met), the fee rate could also increase every Benefit Year, but the rate will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate of 1.50%. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your rate to change. If you opt out of the step-up, the fee rate and the Guaranteed Amount will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the step-up, adjusted for additional Purchase Payments or Excess Withdrawals, if any. This opt-out will only apply for this single Account Value Step-up and is not available if additional Purchase Payments would cause your fee to increase. You will need to notify us each time the fee rate increases if you want to opt out of subsequent Account Value Step-ups.
An increase in the Guaranteed Amount as a result of the 5% Enhancement or 200% step-up will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee.
Once cumulative additional Purchase Payments into your annuity contract after the first Benefit Year equal or exceed $100,000, any additional Purchase Payment will cause the fee rate for your rider to change to the current fee rate in effect on the next Benefit Year anniversary, but the fee rate will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. The new fee rate will become effective on the Benefit Year anniversary.
The protected lifetime income fee will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. A portion of the protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death) or surrender of the Contract.
If the Guaranteed Amount is reduced to zero while the Contractowner is receiving a lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal, no protected lifetime income fee will be deducted.
If you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus Option, an additional 0.15% of the Guaranteed Amount will be added to the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage charge. This total charge rate (which may change as discussed above) is in effect until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. If you exercise your Plus Option, this entire rider and its charge will terminate. If you do not exercise the Plus Option, after the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, the 0.15% charge for the Plus Option will be removed and the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage rider and charge will continue. If you make a withdrawal prior to the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, you will not be able to exercise the Plus Option, but the additional 0.15% charge will remain on your Contract until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary.
Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage purchasers. For purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage who terminate their rider and purchase i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2 or 3), the Guaranteed Income Benefit which is purchased with i4LIFE® Advantage is subject to a current annual fee rate of 0.50% of the Account Value, which is added to the i4LIFE®Advantage charge rate for a total current charge rate of the Account Value, computed daily as follows: 2.40% for the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit; 2.45% for the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit; and 2.70% for the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB.
C-1
Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage are guaranteed that in the future the guaranteed maximum charge for the Guaranteed Income Benefit will be the guaranteed maximum charge then in effect at the time that they purchase Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will not change unless you elect an additional step-up period during which the Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped-up to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment (described later). At the time you elect a new step-up period, the charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed) up to the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 1.50% of the Account Value. If we automatically administer the step-up period election for you and your charge rate is increased, you may ask us to reverse the step-up period election by giving us notice within 30 days after the date on which the step-up period election occurred. If we receive this notice, we will decrease the charge rate, on a going forward basis, to the charge rate in effect before the step-up period election occurred. Any increased charges paid between the time of the step-up and the date we receive your notice to reverse the step-up will not be reimbursed.
After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, the Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge will also terminate but the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will continue.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage Charge. There is a fee associated with this rider as long as the rider is in effect. The current annual fee rate is listed in the following tables.
1.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage 5 Year Elective Step-up option – The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of the next election of a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount. 
 
Current Fee
Beginning January 11, 2021
0.95%
December 3, 2012 through January 10, 2021
0.85%
January 20, 2009 through December 2, 2012
0.65%
Prior to January 20, 2009
0.45%
2.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up (including the prior versions of Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up, single life only) – The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of the automatic or elected step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after the 10th Benefit Year anniversary. 
 
Current Fee
 
Single
Life
Joint
Life
Beginning January 11, 2021
1.00%
1.25%
December 3, 2012 through January 10, 2021
0.85%
1.00%
Prior to December 3, 2012
0.65%
0.80%
The charge is based on the Guaranteed Amount (initial Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credits or Contract Value at the time of election) as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits and step-ups and decreased for withdrawals. We will deduct the cost of this rider from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis, with the first deduction occurring on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the effective date of the rider. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and the fixed side of the contract on the Valuation Date the rider charge is assessed. In Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option and the prior version of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up (without the single or joint life option), the charge may be deducted in proportion to the value in the fixed account as well. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Guaranteed Amount increases or decreases, because the charge is based on the Guaranteed Amount. Because Bonus Credits increase the Guaranteed Amount, Bonus Credits also increase the amount we deduct for the cost of the rider.
Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, the annual rider charge rate will not change upon each automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Amount for the 10-year period.
If you elect to step-up the Guaranteed Amount for another step-up period (including if we administer the step-up election for you or if you make a change from a joint life to a single life option after a death or divorce), a portion of the rider charge, based on the number of days prior to the step-up, will be deducted on the Valuation Date of the step-up based on the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the step-up. This deduction covers the cost of the rider from the time of the previous deduction to the date of the step-up. After a Contractowner's step-up, we will deduct the rider charge for the stepped-up Guaranteed Amount on a quarterly basis, beginning on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the step-up. At the time of the elected step-up, the rider charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed), but it will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 0.95% of the Guaranteed Amount for the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option or 1.50% of the Guaranteed Amount for the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up
C-2
option. If you never elect to step-up your Guaranteed Amount, your rider charge rate will never change, although the amount we deduct will change as the Guaranteed Amount changes. The rider charge will be discontinued upon the earlier of the Annuity Commencement Date, election of i4LIFE® Advantage or termination of the rider. A portion of the rider charge, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except upon death) or surrender of the Contract.
Rider Charge Waiver. For the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option, after the later of the fifth anniversary of the effective date of the rider or the fifth anniversary of the most recent step-up of the Guaranteed Amount, the rider charge may be waived. For the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, no rider charge waiver is available with the single life and joint life options. The earlier version of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option has a waiver charge provision which may occur after the fifth Benefit Year anniversary following the last automatic step-up opportunity.
Whenever the above conditions are met, on each Valuation Date the rider charge is to be deducted, if the total withdrawals from the Contract have been less than or equal to 10% of the sum of: (1) the Guaranteed Amount on the effective date of this rider or on the most recent step-up date; and (2) Purchase Payments (and Bonus Credits) made after the step-up, then the quarterly rider charge will be waived. If the withdrawals have been more than 10%, then the rider charge will not be waived.
4LATER® Advantage Charge . There is a fee associated with this rider as long as the rider is in effect. The current annual fee rate is listed in the following table. 
 
Current Fee
Beginning January 11, 2021
0.90%
January 20, 2009 through January 10, 2021
0.65%
Prior to January 20, 2009
0.50%
The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of the last automatic or elected reset of the Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base (an amount equal to the initial Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit if purchased at contract issue, or Contract Value at the time of election if elected after the contract effective date), as adjusted, is a value that will be used to calculate the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit. The Protected Income Base is increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, automatic 15% enhancements and resets, and decreased for withdrawals. An amount equal to the quarterly 4LATER® protected lifetime income fee rate multiplied by the Protected Income Base will be deducted from the Subaccounts on every three-month anniversary of the later of the 4LATER® rider effective date or the most recent reset of the Protected Income Base. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount on the Valuation Date the 4LATER® protected lifetime income fee is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase as the Protected Income Base increases, because the fee is based on the Protected Income Base. As described in more detail below, the only time the Protected Income Base will change is when there are additional Purchase Payments, withdrawals, automatic enhancements at the end of the 3-year waiting periods or in the event of a reset to the current Account Value.
Upon a reset of the Protected Income Base, a portion of the protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days prior to the reset, will be deducted on the Valuation Date of the reset based on the Protected Income Base immediately prior to the reset. This deduction covers the cost of the 4LATER® rider from the time of the previous deduction to the date of the reset. After the reset, we will deduct the 4LATER® protected lifetime income fee for the reset Protected Income Base on a quarterly basis, beginning on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the reset. At the time of the reset, the annual fee rate will be the current fee rate in effect at the time of reset. At the time of each reset (whether you elect the reset or we administer the reset for you), the annual fee rate will change to the current fee rate in effect at the time of the reset, not to exceed the guaranteed maximum fee rate of 1.50% of the Protected Income Base. At the time of reset, a new Waiting Period will begin. Subsequent resets may be elected at the end of each new Waiting Period. The reset will be effective on the next Valuation Date after notice of the reset is approved by us. If you never elect to reset your Protected Income Base, your 4LATER® protected lifetime income fee rate will never change, although the amount we deduct will change as your Protected Income Base changes.
Prior to the Periodic Income Commencement Date, a portion of the 4LATER® protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the 4LATER® rider for any reason other than death. On the Periodic Income Commencement Date, a portion of the 4LATER® protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be made to cover the cost of 4LATER® since the previous deduction.
i4LIFE® Advantage with 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for Contractowners who transition from 4LATER® Advantage. The 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit current annual protected lifetime income fee rate for purchasers who previously purchased 4LATER® Advantage is 0.65% of the Account Value, which is added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate for a total current charge rate of the Account Value, computed daily as follows: 2.55% for the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit; 2.60% for the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit; and 2.85% for the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB. (For riders purchased before January 20, 2009, the current annual charge rate is 0.50%, but will increase to 0.65% upon the next election to reset the Protected Income Base.) These charges apply only during the i4LIFE® Advantage payout phase.
C-3
On and after the Periodic Income Commencement Date, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit charge will be added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate as a daily percentage of average Account Value. This is a change to the calculation of the 4LATER® charge because after the Periodic Income Commencement Date, when the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is established, the Protected Income Base is no longer applicable. The 4LATER® charge rate is the same immediately before and after the Periodic Income Commencement Date; however, the charge is multiplied by the Protected Income Base (on a quarterly basis) prior to the Periodic Income Commencement Date and then multiplied by the average daily Account Value after the Periodic Income Commencement Date.
After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will not change unless the Contractowner elects additional 15-year step-up periods during which the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped-up to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment. At the time of a reset of the 15-year step-up period, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed) up to the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 1.50% of Account Value. After we administer this election, you have 30 days to notify us if you wish to reverse the election (because you do not wish to incur the additional cost). If we receive this notice, we will decrease the charge rate, on a going forward basis, to the charge rate in effect before the step-up occurred.
After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge will also terminate but the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will continue.
Discontinued Living Benefit Riders
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage
The Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage rider provides minimum, guaranteed, periodic withdrawals for your life as Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option) or for the lives of you as Contractowner/Annuitant and your spouse as joint owner or primary Beneficiary (joint life option) regardless of the investment performance of the Contract, provided that certain conditions are met. A minimum Protected Income Base is used to calculate the periodic withdrawals from your Contract, but is not available as a separate benefit upon death or surrender. The Protected Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit applicable to that Purchase Payment (or Contract Value if elected after contract issue) increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups, 5% Enhancements and the step-up to 200% of the initial Protected Income Base and decreased by withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason.
This rider provides annual withdrawals of 5% of the initial Protected Income Base called Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts. With the single life option, you may receive Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts for your lifetime. If you purchased the joint life option, Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts for the lifetimes of you and your spouse are available. Withdrawals in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount and any withdrawals prior to age 59 (for the single life option) or age 65 (for the joint life option) may significantly reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. Withdrawals will also negatively impact the availability of the 5% Enhancement, the 200% step-up and Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus. These options are discussed below in detail.
An additional option, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus, provides that on the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, provided you have not made any withdrawals, you may choose to cancel your Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage rider and receive an increase in your Contract Value of an amount equal to the excess of your initial Protected Income Base (and Purchase Payments plus applicable Bonus Credits made within 90 days of rider election) over your Contract Value. This option guarantees at least a return of your initial Purchase Payment after 7 years. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus must have been purchased with the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus is discussed in detail below.
If you purchased this rider, you are limited in how you can invest in the Subaccounts in your Contract. In addition, the fixed account is not available except for use with dollar cost averaging. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements - Option 3 if you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage on or after January 20, 2009. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements – Option 2 if you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage prior to January 20, 2009.
We have designed the rider to protect you from outliving your Contract Value. If the rider terminates or you (or your spouse, if applicable) die before your Contract Value is reduced to zero, neither you nor your estate will receive any lifetime withdrawals from us under the rider. We limit your withdrawals to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount and impose Investment Requirements in order to minimize the risk that your Contract Value will be reduced to zero before your (or your spouse’s) death.
Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.
C-4
Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under this rider. The Protected Income Base is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Protected Income Base was established when you elected the rider. If you elected the rider at the time you purchased the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base equaled your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elected the rider after we issued the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base equaled the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million. This maximum takes into consideration the total Protected Income Bases from all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives under either the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage or Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage.
Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits automatically increase the Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment, which receives a 3% Bonus Credit, will increase the Protected Income Base by $10,300. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. If after the first Benefit Year cumulative additional Purchase Payments equal or exceed $100,000 the charge for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will change to the then current charge in effect on the next Benefit Year anniversary. The charge will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual charge. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason including market loss.
The following example demonstrates the impact of additional Purchase Payments on the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage charge: 
Initial Purchase Payment
$100,000
 
Additional Purchase Payment in Year 2
$95,000
No change to charge
Additional Purchase Payment in Year 3
$50,000
Charge will be the then current charge
Additional Purchase Payment in Year 4
$25,000
Charge will be the then current charge
Each withdrawal reduces the Protected Income Base as discussed below.
5% Enhancement to the Protected Income Base. On each Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base, minus Purchase Payments and any applicable Bonus Credits received in the preceding Benefit Year, will be increased by 5% if the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under 86 and the rider is within the 10 year period described below. Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before the 5% Enhancement will be made on the portion of the Protected Income Base equal to that Purchase Payment (and Bonus Credit). Any Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Protected Income Base for purposes of receiving the 5% Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.
Note: The 5% Enhancement is not available in any Benefit Year there is a withdrawal from Contract Value including a Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A 5% Enhancement will occur in subsequent years after a withdrawal only under certain conditions. If you are eligible (as defined below) for the 5% Enhancement in the next year, the enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.
The following is an example of the impact of the 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base:
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Bonus Credit of 4% = $4,000; Protected Income Base = $104,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Bonus Credit of 4% = $600; Protected Income Base = $119,600
Additional Purchase Payment on day 95 = $10,000; Bonus Credit of 4% = $400; Protected Income Base = $130,000
On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will never be less than $135,980 ($119,600 x 1.05 = $125,580 + $10,400). The $10,000 Purchase Payment and $400 Bonus Credit on day 95 is not eligible for the 5% Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary.
The 5% Enhancement will be in effect for 10 years from the effective date of the rider. The 5% Enhancement will cease upon the death of the Contractowner/Annuitant or upon the death of the survivor of the Contractowner or spouse (if joint life option is in effect) or when the oldest of these individuals reaches age 86. A new 10-year period will begin each time an Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value occurs as described below. As explained below, the 5% Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides a greater increase to the Protected Income Base, you will not receive the 5% Enhancement. The 5% Enhancement cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million. For riders purchased prior to January 20, 2009, the 5% Enhancement will be in effect for 15 years from the effective date of the rider, and a new 15-year period will begin following each Account Value Step-up.
Any withdrawal from the Contract Value limits the 5% Enhancement as follows:
a.
The 5% Enhancement will not occur on any Benefit Year anniversary in which there is a withdrawal, including a Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, from the Contract during that Benefit Year. The 5% Enhancement will occur on the following
C-5
Benefit Year anniversary if no other withdrawals are made from the Contract and the rider is within the 10-year period as long as the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option) is 59 or older or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life option) are age 65 or older.
b.
If the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option) is under age 59 or the Contractowner or spouse (joint life option) is under age 65, and a withdrawal is made from the Contract, the 5% Enhancement will not occur again until an Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value (as described below) occurs.
An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the 5% Enhancement is included in the Withdrawals section below.
If your Protected Income Base is increased by the 5% Enhancement on the Benefit Year anniversary, your charge rate for the rider will not change. However, the amount you pay for the rider will increase since the charge for the rider is based on the Protected Income Base.
Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base will automatically step-up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:
a.
the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life option) are both still living and under age 86; and
b.
the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date is greater than the Protected Income Base after the 5% Enhancement (if any) or 200% step-up (if any, as described below).
If you decline the Account Value Step-up, you will receive the 200% step-up (if you are eligible as described below) or the 5% Enhancement (if you are eligible as specified above); however, a new 10-year period for 5% Enhancements will not begin. You may not decline the Account Value Step-up, if applicable, if your additional Purchase Payments would cause your charge to increase. See the earlier Protected Income Base section.
Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-ups and the 5% Enhancement will work (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments and issue age above 59 (single life) or 65 (joint life): 
 
Contract
Value
Guaranteed
Amount
Potential for
Charge to
Change
Length of 5%
Enhancement
Period
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000 + 3%
Bonus Credit
$51,500
$51,500
No
10
1st Benefit Year anniversary
$54,000
$54,075
No
9
2nd Benefit Year anniversary
$53,900
$56,779
No
8
3rd Benefit Year anniversary
$57,000
$59,618
No
7
4th Benefit Year anniversary
$64,000
$64,000
Yes
10
On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement increased the Protected Income Base to $54,075 since the increase in the Contract Value ($2,500) is less than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,575 (5% of $51,500). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,075 = $2,704). On the third Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $56,779 = $2,839). On the fourth Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value was greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,981 (5% of $59,618) and a new 10-year Enhancement Period began.
An Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.
Step-up to 200% of the initial Protected Income Base. For Contractowners who purchase Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage on or after January 20, 2009, on the Benefit Year anniversary after you (single life) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life) reach age 65, or the rider has been in effect for ten years, whichever event is later, we will step-up your Protected Income Base to 200% of your initial Protected Income Base (plus any Purchase Payments, including Bonus Credits, made within 90 days of rider election), less any withdrawals, if this would increase your Protected Income Base to an amount higher than that provided by the 5% Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up for that year, if applicable. (You will not also receive the 5% Enhancement or Account Value Step-up if the 200% Step-up applies.) This step-up will not occur if:
1.
any withdrawal was made prior to age 59 (single life) or age 65 (joint life);
2.
an Excess Withdrawal (defined below) has occurred; or
3.
cumulative withdrawals totaling more than 10% of the initial Protected Income Base (plus Purchase Payments and applicable Bonus Credits within 90 days of rider election) have been made (even if these withdrawals were within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount).
C-6
For example, assume the initial Protected Income Base is $208,000. A $10,400 Maximum Annual Withdrawal was made at age 65 and at age 66. If one more $10,400 Maximum Annual Withdrawal was made at age 67, the step-up would not be available since withdrawals cannot exceed $20,800 (10% of $208,000).
If you purchased the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage prior to January 20, 2009, you will not be eligible to receive the 200% step-up of the Protected Income Base until the Benefit Year anniversary after you (single life) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life) reach age 70, or the rider has been in effect for ten years, whichever event is later.
This step-up is only available one time and it will not occur if, on the applicable Benefit Year anniversary, your Protected Income Base exceeds 200% of your initial Protected Income Base (plus Purchase Payments and applicable Bonus Credits within 90 days of rider election). Required minimum distributions (RMDs) from qualified contracts may adversely impact this benefit because you may have to withdraw more than 10% of your initial Protected Income Base. See the terms governing RMDs in the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount section below.
The following example demonstrates the impact of this Step-up on the Protected Income Base:
Initial Purchase Payment at age 55 = $200,000; Bonus Credit of $8,000; Protected Income Base =$208,000; Initial Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount = $10,400.
After ten years, at age 65, the Protected Income Base is $283,232 (after applicable 5% Enhancements and two withdrawals of $10,400) and the Contract Value is $250,000. Since the Protected Income Base is less than $374,400 ($208,000 initial Protected Income Base reduced by the two $10,400 withdrawals x 200%), the Protected Income Base is increased to $374,400.
The 200% step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.
Protected Annual Income Amount. You may make periodic withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount each Benefit Year for your (Contractowner) lifetime (single life option) or the lifetimes of you and your spouse (joint life option) as long as you are at least age 59 (single life option) or you and your spouse are both at least age 65 (joint life option) and your Protected Annual Income amount is greater than zero.
On the effective date of the rider, the Protected Annual Income amount is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Income Base. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the extra amount into the next Benefit Year.
If your Contract Value is reduced to zero because of market performance, withdrawals equal to the remaining Protected Annual Income amount for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next rider anniversary, the scheduled amount will resume and continue automatically for your life (and your spouse if applicable under the joint life option) under the Protected Annual Income Payment Option (discussed later). You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base in a lump sum.
Note: if any withdrawal is made, the 5% Enhancement is not available during that Benefit Year and Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus is not available (see below). Withdrawals may also negatively impact the 200% step-up (see above).
The tax consequences of withdrawals are discussed in Federal Tax Matters section of this prospectus.
All withdrawals you make, whether or not within the Protected Annual Income amount, will decrease your Contract Value. Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount.
The Protected Annual Income amount will be doubled, called the Nursing Home Enhancement, during a Benefit Year when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 59 or older or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life option), are both age 65 or older, and one is admitted into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. The Nursing Home Enhancement applies if the admittance into such facility occurs 60 months or more after the effective date of the rider (36 months or more for Contractowners who purchased this rider prior to January 20, 2009), the individual was not in the nursing home in the year prior to the effective date of the rider, and upon entering the nursing home, the person has been then confined for at least 90 consecutive days. Proof of nursing home confinement will be required each year. If you leave the nursing home, your Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced by 50% starting after the next Benefit Year anniversary.
The requirements of an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility are set forth in the Nursing Home Enhancement Claim Form. The criteria for the facility include, but are not limited to: providing 24 hour a day nursing services; an available physician; an employed nurse on duty or call at all times; maintains daily clinical records; and able to dispense medications. This does not include an assisted living or similar facility. For riders purchased on or after January 20, 2009, the admittance to a nursing home must be pursuant to a plan of care provided by a licensed health care practitioner, and the nursing home must be located in the United States.
The remaining references to the 5% Protected Annual Income amount also include the Nursing Home Enhancement Protected Annual Income amount.
C-7
The Protected Annual Income amount is increased by 5% of any additional Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits. For example, if the Protected Annual Income amount of $2,575 (5% of $51,500 Protected Income Base) is in effect and an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 is made (which receives a 3% Bonus Credit), the new Protected Annual Income amount is $3,090 ($2,575 + 5% of $10,300).
5% Enhancements, Account Value Step-ups and the 200% Step-up will cause a recalculation of the eligible Protected Annual Income amount to the greater of:
a.
the Protected Annual Income amount immediately prior to the 5% Enhancement, Account Value Step-up or 200% step-up; or
b.
5% of the Protected Income Base on the Benefit Year anniversary.
See the chart below for examples of the recalculation.
The Protected Annual Income amount from Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount from Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage under all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) applicable to you (or your spouse if joint life option) can never exceed 5% of the maximum Protected Income Base.
Withdrawals after age 59 (Single Life Option) or age 65 (Joint Life Option). If the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) after age 59 (single life) or age 65 (joint life) are within the Protected Annual Income amount, then:
1.
the withdrawal will reduce the Protected Income Base by the amount of the withdrawal on a dollar-for-dollar basis, and
2.
the Protected Annual Income amount will remain the same.
The impact of withdrawals prior to age 59 or age 65 will be discussed later in this section. The following example illustrates the impact of Protected Annual Incomes on the Protected Income Base and the recalculation of the Protected Annual Income amount (assuming no additional Purchase Payments and the Contractowner (single life) is older than 59 and the Contractowner and spouse (joint life) are both older than 65): 
 
Contract
Value
Guaranteed
Amount
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000 + 3% Bonus Credit
$51,500
$51,500
$2,575
1st Benefit Year anniversary
$54,000
$54,000
$2,700
2nd Benefit Year anniversary
$51,000
$51,300
$2,700
3rd Benefit Year anniversary
$57,000
$57,000
$2,850
4th Benefit Year anniversary
$64,000
$64,000
$3,200
The initial Protected Annual Income amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Income Base. Since withdrawals occurred each year (even withdrawals within the Protected Annual Income amount), the 5% Enhancement of the Protected Income Base was not available. However, each year the Account Value Step-up occurred (first, third and fourth Benefit Year anniversaries), the Protected Annual Income amount was recalculated to 5% of the current Protected Income Base.
Withdrawals within the Protected Annual Income amount are not subject to surrender charges. Withdrawals from Individual Retirement Annuity contracts will be treated as within the Protected Annual Income amount (even if they exceed the 5% Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken in systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the RMD rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this exception for RMDs to apply, the following must occur:
1.
Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;
2.
The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;
3.
No withdrawals other than RMDs are made within that Benefit Year (except as described in next paragraph);
4.
This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and
5.
You are over age 59 (age 65 of the youngest life for joint life option).
If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn and will not be subject to surrender charges. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributed to RMDs, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals (see below).
Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.
C-8
Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount. When Excess Withdrawals occur:
1.
The Protected Income Base is reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base could be more than a dollar-for-dollar reduction.
2.
The Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to 5% of the new (reduced) Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal); and
3.
The 200% step-up will never occur.
The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base and the Protected Annual Income amount. A $12,000 withdrawal caused a $15,102 reduction in the Protected Income Base.
Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $5,200 (5% of the initial Protected Income Base of $104,000)
After a $12,000 Withdrawal ($5,200 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $6,800 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value and Protected Income Base are reduced dollar for dollar for the Protected Annual Income amount of $5,200:
Contract Value = $54,800
Protected Income Base = $79,800
The Contract Value is reduced by the $6,800 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base is reduced by 12.41%, the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $54,800 Contract Value ($6,800 / $54,800)
Contract Value = $48,000
Protected Income Base = $69,898 ($79,800 X 12.41% = $9,902; $79,800 - $9,902 = $69,898)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,494.89 (5% of $69,898)
In a declining market, withdrawals that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount may substantially deplete or eliminate your Protected Income Base and reduce or deplete your Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value.
The portion of Excess Withdrawals attributed to Purchase Payments (and not Bonus Credits) will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waiver of surrender charge provisions set forth in your prospectus is applicable. Continuing with the prior example of the $12,000 withdrawal: the $5,200 Protected Annual Income amount is not subject to surrender charges; the $6,800 Excess Withdrawal may be subject to surrender charges. See Charges and Other Deductions - Surrender Charges. Withdrawals attributed to Bonus Credits are not subject to surrender charges.
Withdrawals before age 59/65. If any withdrawal is made prior to the time the Contractowner, is age 59 (single life) or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life) are both age 65, including withdrawals equal to Protected Annual Income amounts, the following will occur:
1.
The Protected Income Base will be reduced in the same proportion that the entire withdrawal reduced the Contract Value (this means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base could be more than a dollar-for-dollar reduction);
2.
The Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to 5% of the new (reduced) Protected Income Base;
3.
The 5% Enhancement to the Protected Income Base is not available until after the next Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value occurs. This Account Value Step-up will not occur until the Contract Value exceeds the Protected Income Base on a Benefit Year anniversary. (See the 5% Enhancement section above); and
4.
The 200% step-up will never occur.
The following is an example of the impact of a withdrawal prior to age 59 for single or age 65 for joint:
●
$100,000 Purchase Payment + $4,000 Bonus Credit
●
$104,000 Protected Income Base
●
A 10% market decline results in a Contract Value of $93,600
●
$5,200 Protected Annual Income amount
If a $5,000 withdrawal is made before age 59, the Protected Income Base will be $98,444 ($104,000 reduced by 5.34% ($5,000/$93,600)) and the new Protected Annual Income amount is $4,922 (5% x $98,444). Surrender charges will apply unless one of the waiver of surrender charge provisions is applicable. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charges.
C-9
In a declining market, withdrawals prior to age 59 (or 65 if joint life) may substantially deplete or eliminate your Protected Income Base and reduce or deplete your Protected Annual Income amount.
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus. If you have purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus, (“Plus Option”), on the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, you may elect to receive an increase in your Contract Value equal to the excess of your initial Protected Income Base, (plus any Purchase Payments and applicable Bonus Credits made within 90 days of the rider effective date) over your current Contract Value. Making this election will terminate the Plus Option as well as Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and the total charge for this rider and you will have no further rights to Protected Annual Income amounts or any other benefits under this rider. You have 30 days after the seventh Benefit Year anniversary to make this election, but you will receive no more than the difference between the Contract Value and the initial Protected Income Base (plus any Purchase Payments within 90 days of the rider effective date) on the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. If you choose to surrender your Contract at this time, any applicable surrender charges will apply.
You may not elect to receive an increase in Contract Value if any withdrawal is made, including Protected Annual Income amounts or RMDs, prior to the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. If you make a withdrawal prior to the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, the charge for this Plus Option (in addition to the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage charge) will continue until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. After the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, the 0.15% charge for the Plus Option will be removed from your Contract and the charge for your Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will continue.
If you do not elect to exercise the Plus Option, after the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, your Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and its charge will continue and the Plus Option 0.15% charge will be removed from your Contract.
The following example illustrates the Plus Option upon the seventh Benefit Year anniversary:
Initial Purchase Payment of
$100,000 with a 4% Bonus Credit of $4,000; Initial Protected Income Base of $104,000.
On the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, if the current Contract Value is $90,000; the Contractowner may choose to have $14,000 placed in the Contract and the Plus Option (including the right to continue the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage) will terminate at that time.
If you purchased the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus option you have limited investment options until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary as set forth in the Investment Requirements section of this prospectus. After the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, you may invest in other Subaccounts in your Contract, subject to the Investment Requirements applicable to your purchase date of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage.
Protected Annual Income Payout Option. If you are required to annuitize your Protected Annual Income amount, because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, the Protected Annual Income Payout Option is available.
The Protected Annual Income Payout Option is a fixed annuitization in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for life (this option is different from other annuity payment options discussed in your prospectus, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value). Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount (including the Nursing Home Enhancement if you qualify) for your life or the life of you and your spouse for the joint life option.
If the Contract Value is zero and you have a remaining Protected Annual Income amount, you will receive the Protected Annual Income Payment Option.
If you are receiving the Protected Annual Income Payout Option, your Beneficiary may be eligible for a final payment upon death of the single life or surviving joint life. To be eligible the Death Benefit option in effect immediately prior to the exercise of the Protected Annual Income Payout Option must not be the Account Value Death Benefit.
The final payment is equal to the sum of all Purchase Payments, decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion as the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value; withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and payments under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option will reduce the sum of the Purchase Payments dollar for dollar. If your Death Benefit option in effect immediately prior to the Protected Annual Income Payout Option provided for deduction for withdrawals on a dollar for dollar basis, then any withdrawals that occurred prior to the election of the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will reduce the sum of all Purchase Payments on a dollar for dollar basis.
Death Prior to the Selection of an Annuity Payout Option. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. In addition, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage provides no increase in value to the Death Benefit over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described in the Death Benefit section of this prospectus) will be in effect.
C-10
Election of the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See Benefits Available Under the Contract – Death Benefit.
Upon the death of the single life, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus will also terminate, if in effect.
Upon the first death under the joint life option, the lifetime payout of the Protected Annual Income amount will continue for the life of the surviving spouse. The 5% Enhancement, 200% step-up, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus and Account Value Step-up will continue if applicable as discussed above. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus will also terminate, if in effect.
Impact of Divorce on Joint Life Option. After a divorce, the Contractowner may keep the joint life option to have the opportunity to receive lifetime payouts for the lives of the Contractowner and a new spouse. This is only available if no withdrawals were made from the Contract after the effective date of the rider up to and including the date the new spouse is added to the rider.
Termination. After the seventh anniversary of the effective date of the rider, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will automatically terminate:
●
Upon exercise of the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus option to receive an increase in the Contract Value equal to the excess of your initial Protected Income Base over the Contract Value;
●
on the selection of an Annuity Payout option (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Payment Option will continue if applicable);
●
if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the surviving Secondary Life under the joint life option assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;
●
upon the death under the single life option or the death of the Secondary Life under the joint life option;
●
when the Protected Annual Income amount is reduced to zero; or
●
upon termination of the underlying annuity contract.
The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Option. Contractowners who previously elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage may decide to later carry over their Protected Income Base to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This decision must be made prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3) is available for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage riders purchased on or after October 6, 2008 and prior to October 31, 2010. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2) is available for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage riders purchased prior to October 6, 2008. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage
This benefit provides a minimum guaranteed amount (Guaranteed Amount) that you will be able to withdraw, in installments, from your Contract. The Guaranteed Amount is equal to the initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit applicable to that Purchase Payment (or Contract Value if elected after contract issue) adjusted for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, step-ups and withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. There are two options that step-up the Guaranteed Amount to a higher level (the Contract Value at the time of the step-up):
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up or
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up
Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up, the Contractowner has the option to step-up the Guaranteed Amount after five years. With the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, the Guaranteed Amount will automatically step up to the Contract Value, if higher, on each Benefit Year anniversary through the tenth anniversary. With the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up, the Contractowner can also initiate additional 10-year periods of automatic step-ups.
You may access this Guaranteed Amount through periodic withdrawals which are based on a percentage of the Guaranteed Amount. With the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up single life or joint life options, you also have the option to receive periodic withdrawals for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse. These options are discussed below in detail.
If you purchased this rider, you are limited in how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements.
C-11
Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If the Contractowner elects to step up the Guaranteed Amount (this does not include Account Value Step-ups within a 10-year period), the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the step-up and each anniversary of the effective date of the step-up after that. The step-up will be effective on the next Valuation Date after notice of the step-up is approved by us. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.
Guaranteed Amount. The Guaranteed Amount is a value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under this rider. The Guaranteed Amount is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Guaranteed Amount varies based on when and how you elect the benefit. If you elected the benefit at the time you purchased the Contract, the Guaranteed Amount equals your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elected the benefit after we issued the Contract, the Guaranteed Amount equals the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The maximum Guaranteed Amount is $5,000,000 under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option and $10 million for Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option. This maximum takes into consideration the combined guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.
Additional Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits automatically increase the Guaranteed Amount by the amount of the Purchase Payment and Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment , which receives a 3% Bonus Credit, will increase the Guaranteed Amount by $10,300. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value is zero.
Each withdrawal reduces the Guaranteed Amount as discussed below.
Since the charge for the rider is based on the Guaranteed Amount, the cost of the rider increases when additional Purchase Payments and step-ups are made and any Bonus Credits are received, and the cost decreases as withdrawals are made because these transactions all adjust the Guaranteed Amount.
Step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount. Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, the Guaranteed Amount will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary up to and including the tenth Benefit Year if:
a.
the Contractowner or joint owner is still living; and
b.
the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including any surrender charges and other deductions ), the rider charge and account fee plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date is greater than the Guaranteed Amount immediately preceding the Valuation Date.
After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, you may initiate another 10-year period of automatic step-ups by electing (in writing) to step-up the Guaranteed Amount to the greater of the Contract Value or the current Guaranteed Amount if:
a.
each Contractowner and Annuitant is under age 81; and
b.
the Contractowner or joint owner is still living.
If you choose, we will administer this election for you automatically, so that a new 10-year period of step-ups will begin at the end of each prior 10-year step-up period.
Following is an example of how the step-ups work in the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments): 
 
Contract
Value
Guaranteed
Amount
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000 (3% Bonus Credit)
$51,500
$51,500
1st Benefit Year anniversary
$54,000
$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary
$53,900
$54,000
3rd Benefit Year anniversary
$57,000
$57,000
Annual step-ups, if the conditions are met, will continue until (and including) the tenth Benefit Year anniversary. If you had elected to have the next 10-year period of step-ups begin automatically after the prior 10-year period, annual step-ups, if conditions are met, will continue beginning on the eleventh Benefit Year anniversary.
Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option, after the fifth anniversary of the rider, you may elect (in writing) to step-up the Guaranteed Amount to an amount equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the step-up. Additional step-ups are permitted, but you must wait at least 5 years between each step-up.
C-12
Under both the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up and the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up options, Contractowner elected step-ups (other than automatic step-ups) will be effective on the next Valuation Date after we receive your request and a new Benefit Year will begin. Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, and withdrawals made after a step-up adjust the Guaranteed Amount. In the future, we may limit your right to step up the Guaranteed Amount to your Benefit Year anniversary dates. All step-ups are subject to the maximum Guaranteed Amount.
A Contractowner elected step-up (including Contractowner step-ups that we administer for you to begin a new ten-year step-up period) may cause a change in the charge rate for this benefit. There is no change in the charge rate when automatic, annual step-ups occur during a ten-year period.
Withdrawals. You will have access to your Guaranteed Amount through periodic withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount each Benefit Year until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero. On the effective date of the rider, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is:
●
7% of the Guaranteed Amount under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 5 Year Elective Step-up option and
●
5% of the Guaranteed Amount under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option.
If you do not withdraw the entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the extra amount into the next Benefit Year. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is increased by 7% or 5% (depending on your option) of any additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits. For example, if the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option with a Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount of $2,575 (5% of $51,500 Guaranteed Amount) is in effect and an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 is made (which receives a 3% Bonus Credit), the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is $3,090 ($2,575 + 5% of $10,300). Step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount (both automatic step-ups and step-ups elected by you) will step-up the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to the greater of:
a.
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the step-up; or
b.
7% or 5% (depending on your option) of the new (stepped-up) Guaranteed Amount.
If the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) are within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, then:
1.
the withdrawal will reduce the Guaranteed Amount by the amount of the withdrawal on a dollar-for-dollar basis, and
2.
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will remain the same.
Withdrawals within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount are not subject to surrender charges or the Interest Adjustment on the amount withdrawn from the fixed account, if applicable. See Fixed Side of the Contract.
If the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option is in effect, withdrawals from IRA contracts will be treated as within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount (even if they exceed the 5% Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount) only if:
●
Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;
●
the RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;
●
no withdrawals other than RMDs are made within the Benefit Year; and
●
this Contract is not a beneficiary IRA.
Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.
When cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount:
1.
The Guaranteed Amount is reduced to the lesser of:
●
the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal; or
●
the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the amount of the withdrawal.
2.
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be the lesser of:
●
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the withdrawal; or
●
the greater of:
●
7% or 5% (depending on your option) of the reduced Guaranteed Amount immediately following the withdrawal (as specified above when withdrawals exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount); or
●
7% or 5% (depending on your option) of the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal; or
●
the new Guaranteed Amount.
C-13
The following example of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A $7,000 Excess Withdrawal caused a $29,400 reduction in the Guaranteed Amount.
Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Guaranteed Amount = $82,400
Maximum Annual Withdrawal = $5,200 (5% of the initial Guaranteed Amount of $104,000)
Initial Guaranteed Amount of $104,000 equals $100,000 Purchase Payment and 4% Bonus Credit
After a $7,000 Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $53,000
Guaranteed Amount = $53,000
Maximum Annual Withdrawal = $2,650
The Guaranteed Amount was reduced to the lesser of the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal ($53,000) or the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the amount of the withdrawal ($82,400 - $7,000 = $75,400).
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount was reduced to the lesser of:
1) Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount prior to the withdrawal ($5,200); or
2) The greater of 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount ($2,650) or 5% of the Contract Value following the withdrawal ($2,650); or
3) The new Guaranteed Amount ($53,000).
The lesser of these three items is $2,650.
In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may substantially deplete or eliminate your Guaranteed Amount and reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount.
Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 5 Year Elective Step-up option for IRA contracts, the annual amount available for withdrawal within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount may not be sufficient to satisfy your required minimum distributions under the Internal Revenue Code. This is particularly true for individuals over age 84. Therefore, you may have to make withdrawals that exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. Withdrawals over the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount may quickly and substantially decrease your Guaranteed Amount and Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, especially in a declining market. You should consult your tax advisor to determine if there are ways to limit the risks associated with those withdrawals. Such methods may involve the timing of withdrawals or foregoing step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount.
Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges and an Interest Adjustment on the amount withdrawn from the fixed account. Refer to the Statement of Additional Information for an example of the Interest Adjustment calculation.
Lifetime Withdrawals. (Available only with the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up Single or Joint Life options and not the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 5 Year Elective Step-up option or the prior version of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option). Payment of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be guaranteed for your (Contractowner) lifetime (single life option) or for the lifetimes of you (Contractowner) and your spouse (joint life option), as long as:
1) No withdrawals are made before you (and your spouse if a joint life) are age 65; and
2) An excess withdrawal (described above) has not reduced the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to zero.
If the lifetime withdrawal is not in effect, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will last only until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero.
If any withdrawal is made prior to the time you (or both spouses) are age 65, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will not last for the lifetime(s), except in the two situations described below:
1) If a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after age 65 causes the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to equal or increase from the immediately prior Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. This typically occurs if the Contract Value equals or exceeds the highest, prior Guaranteed Amount. If this happens, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will automatically be available for the specified lifetime(s); or
2) The Contractowner makes a one-time election to reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to 5% of the current Guaranteed Amount. This reset will occur on the first Valuation Date following the Benefit Year anniversary and will be based on the Guaranteed Amount as of that Valuation Date. This will reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A Contractowner would only choose this if the above situation did not occur. To reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, the following must occur:
a.
the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) is age 65;
b.
the Contract is currently within a 10-year automatic step-up period described above (or else a Contractowner submits a step-up request to start a new 10-year automatic step-up period) (the Contractowner must be eligible to elect a step-up i.e. all Contractowners and the Annuitant must be alive and under age 81); and
C-14
c.
you have submitted this request to us in writing at least 30 days prior to the end of the Benefit Year.
As an example of these two situations, if you purchased the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up with $100,000 (and received a Bonus Credit of 4%), your initial Guaranteed Amount is $104,000 and your initial Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is $5,200. If you make a $5,000 withdrawal at age 62, your Guaranteed Amount will decrease to $99,000. Since you did not satisfy the age 65 requirement, you do not have a lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. If a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after age 65 (either automatic or Contractowner-elected) causes the Guaranteed Amount to equal or exceed $104,000, then the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount of $5,200 (or greater) will become a lifetime payout. This is the first situation described above. However, if the Guaranteed Amount has not been reset to equal or exceed the highest prior Guaranteed Amount, then you can choose the second situation described above if you are age 65 and the Contract is within a ten-year automatic step-up period. This will reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to 5% of the current Guaranteed Amount, 5% of $99,000 is $4,950. This is your new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount which can be paid for your lifetime unless Excess Withdrawals are made.
The tax consequences of withdrawals and annuity payments are discussed in Federal Tax Matters.
All withdrawals you make, whether or not within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, will decrease your Contract Value. If the Contract is surrendered, the Contractowner will receive the Contract Value (less any applicable charges, fees, and taxes) and not the Guaranteed Amount.
If your Contract Value is reduced to zero because of market performance, withdrawals equal to the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next rider anniversary, the scheduled amount will resume and continue for the life of you (and your spouse if applicable) if the lifetime withdrawals are in effect. If not, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero. You may not withdraw the remaining Guaranteed Amount in a lump sum.
Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option. If you desire to annuitize your Guaranteed Amount, the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option is available. The Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option is a fixed annuitization in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive the Guaranteed Amount in annual annuity payments equal to the current 7% or 5% (depending on your option) Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, including the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawals if in effect (this option is different from other annuity payment options discussed in this prospectus, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value). Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. Payments will continue until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero (or until death if the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal is in effect) and your Contract terminates. This may result in a partial, final payment. You would consider this option only if your Contract Value is less than the Guaranteed Amount (and you don't believe the Contract Value will ever exceed the Guaranteed Amount) and you do not wish to keep your annuity contract in force other than to pay out the Guaranteed Amount. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero (or until death if the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal is in effect).
If the Contract Value is zero and you have a remaining Guaranteed Amount, you may not withdraw the remaining Guaranteed Amount in a lump sum, but must elect the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option.
Death Prior to the Selection of an Annuity Payout Option. There is no provision for a lump sum payout of the Guaranteed Amount upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. In addition, Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid other than any applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See Benefits Available Under the Contract – Death Benefit.
Upon the death of the single life under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, if in effect, will end. If the Contract is continued as discussed below, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount, if any, is zero. In the alternative, the surviving spouse can choose to become the new single life, if the surviving spouse is under age 81. This will cause a reset of the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. The new Guaranteed Amount will equal the Contract Value on the date of the reset and the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount. This also starts a new 10-year period of automatic step-ups. At this time, the charge for the rider will become the current charge in effect for the single life option. The surviving spouse will need to be 65 before taking withdrawals to qualify for a lifetime payout. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider: 1) the change a reset would cause to the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount; 2) whether it is important to have Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts for life versus the remainder of the prior Guaranteed Amount; and 3) the cost of the single life option.
Upon the first death under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up - joint life option, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, if in effect, will continue for the life of the surviving spouse. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will end. However, if the spouse's Beneficiary elects to take
C-15
the annuity Death Benefit in installments over life expectancy, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount, if any, is zero (see below for a non-spouse Beneficiary). As an alternative, after the first death, the surviving spouse may choose to change from the joint life option to the single life option, if the surviving spouse is under age 81. This will cause a reset of the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. The new Guaranteed Amount will equal the Contract Value on the date of the reset and the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount. This also starts a new 10-year period of automatic step-ups. At this time, the charge for the rider will become the current charge in effect for the single life option. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider: 1) if the reset will cause the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to decrease and 2) if the cost of the single life option is less than the cost of the joint life option.
If the surviving spouse of the deceased Contractowner continues the Contract, the remaining automatic step-ups under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, will apply to the spouse as the new Contractowner. Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 5 Year Elective Step-up option, the new Contractowner is eligible to elect to step-up the Guaranteed Amount prior to the next available step-up date; however, all other conditions for the step-up apply and any subsequent step-up by the new Contractowner must meet all conditions for a step-up.
If a non-spouse Beneficiary elects to receive the Death Benefit in installments over life expectancy (thereby keeping the Contract in force), the Beneficiary may continue the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage if desired. Automatic step-ups under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage - 1 Year Automatic Step-up option will not continue and elective step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount under both options will not be permitted. In the event the Contract Value declines below the Guaranteed Amount (as adjusted for withdrawals of Death Benefit payments), the Beneficiary is assured of receiving payments equal to the Guaranteed Amount (as adjusted). Deductions for the protected lifetime income fee will continue on a quarterly basis and will be charged against the remaining Guaranteed Amount. Note: there are instances where the required installments of the Death Benefit, in order to be in compliance with the Internal Revenue Code as noted above, may exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, thereby reducing the benefit of this rider. If there are multiple Beneficiaries, each Beneficiary will be entitled to continue a share of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage equal to his or her share of the Death Benefit.
Impact of Divorce on Joint Life Option. In the event of a divorce, the Contractowner may change from a joint life option to a single life option (if the Contractowner is under age 81) at the current protected lifetime income fee of the single life option. At the time of the change, the Guaranteed Amount will be reset to the current Contract Value and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will equal 5% of this new Guaranteed Amount.
After a divorce, the Contractowner may keep the joint life option to have the opportunity to receive lifetime payouts for the lives of the Contractowner and a new spouse. This is only available if no withdrawals were made from the Contract after the effective date of the rider up to and including the date the new spouse is added to the rider.
Termination. After the later of the fifth Benefit Year anniversary of the effective date of the rider or the fifth Benefit Year anniversary of the most recent Contractowner-elected step-up, including any step-up we administered for you, of the Guaranteed Amount, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage will automatically terminate:
●
on the selection of an Annuity Payout option (except payments under the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option will continue if applicable);
●
upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage;
●
if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the surviving Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;
●
upon the last payment of the Guaranteed Amount unless the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal is in effect;
●
when the Maximum Annual Withdrawal or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal; or
●
Upon termination of the underlying annuity contract.
The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Guaranteed Amount. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Option. Prior to May 18, 2020, Contractowners who previously elected Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage may decide to later carry over their Guaranteed Amount to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit. The charge, Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages, Access Period requirements, and Investment Requirements will be those that currently apply to new elections of i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit. This decision must be made prior to the maximum age limit and prior to the selection of an Annuity Payout option. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. These transitions are not allowed on or after May 18, 2020.
4LATER® Advantage
4LATER® Advantage (or “4LATER®”) is a rider that protects against market loss by providing you with a method to receive a minimum payout from your annuity. The rider provides a Protected Income Base (described below) prior to the time you begin taking payouts
C-16
from your annuity. If you elected 4LATER® Advantage, you must elect i4LIFE® Advantage with the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Advantage. Election of this rider may limit how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements.
4LATER® Advantage Before Payouts Begin
The following discussion applies to 4LATER® Advantage during the accumulation phase of your annuity, referred to as 4LATER®. This is prior to the time any payouts begin under i4LIFE® Advantage with the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit.
Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base is a value established when you purchased 4LATER® and will only be used to calculate the minimum payouts available under your Contract at a later date. The Protected Income Base is not available for withdrawals or as a Death Benefit. If you elected 4LATER® at the time you purchase the Contract, the Protected Income Base initially equals the Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits. If you elected 4LATER® after we issue the Contract, the Protected Income Base will initially equal the Contract Value on the 4LATER® effective date. Additional Purchase Payments automatically increase the Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value is zero. Each withdrawal reduces the Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal.
As described below, during the accumulation phase, the Protected Income Base will be automatically enhanced by 15% (adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credit and withdrawals as described in the Future Protected Income Base section below) at the end of each Waiting Period. In addition, after the Initial Waiting Period, you may elect to reset your Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value if your Contract Value has grown beyond the 15% enhancement. You may elect this reset on your own or you may choose to have Lincoln Life automatically reset the Protected Income Base for you at the end of each Waiting Period. These reset options are discussed below. Then, when you are ready to elect i4LIFE® Advantage and establish the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Protected Income Base (if higher than the Contract Value) is used in the 4LATER® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit calculation.
Waiting Period. The Waiting Period is each consecutive 3-year period which begins on the 4LATER® Effective Date, or on the date of any reset of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value. At the end of each completed Waiting Period, the Protected Income Base is increased by 15% (as adjusted for Purchase Payments, corresponding Bonus Credits, and withdrawals) to equal the Future Protected Income Base as discussed below. The Waiting Period is also the amount of time that must pass before the Protected Income Base can be reset to the current Contract Value. A new Waiting Period begins after each reset and must be completed before the next 15% enhancement or another reset occurs.
Future Protected Income Base. 4LATER® provides a 15% automatic enhancement to the Protected Income Base after a 3-year Waiting Period. This enhancement will continue every 3 years until i4LIFE® Advantage is elected, you terminate 4LATER® or you reach the Maximum Protected Income Base. See Maximum Protected Income Base. During the Waiting Period, the Future Protected Income Base is established to provide the value of this 15% enhancement on the Protected Income Base. After each 3-year Waiting Period is satisfied, the Protected Income Base is increased to equal the value of the Future Protected Income Base. The 4LATER® charge will then be assessed on this newly adjusted Protected Income Base, but the charge rate will not change.
Any Purchase Payment made after the 4LATER® Effective Date, but within 90 days of the contract effective date, will increase the Future Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and corresponding Bonus Credit, plus 15% of that Purchase Payment and Bonus Credit.
Example: 
Initial Purchase Payment and corresponding Bonus Credit
$104,000
 
Purchase Payment and corresponding Bonus Credit 60 days later
$10,400
 
Protected Income Base
$114,400
 
Future Protected Income Base (during the 1st Waiting Period)
$131,560
($114,400 x 115%)
Protected Income Base (after 1st Waiting Period)
$131,560
 
New Future Protected Income Base (during 2nd Waiting Period)
$151,294
($131,560 x 115%)
Any Purchase Payments made after the 4LATER® Effective Date and more than 90 days after the contract effective date will increase the Future Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and corresponding Bonus Credit plus 15% of that Purchase Payment and corresponding Bonus Credit proportionately for the number of full years remaining in the current Waiting Period.
Example: 
C-17
Protected Income Base
$104,000
 
Purchase Payment and corresponding Bonus Credit in Year 2
$10,400
 
New Protected Income Base
$114,400
 
Future Protected Income Base (during 1st Waiting Period-Year 2)
$130,520
($104,000 x 115%) + ($10,400 x 100%) +
 
($10,400 x 15% x 1/3)
Protected Income Base (after 1st Waiting Period)
$130,520
 
New Future Protected Income Base (during 2nd Waiting Period)
$150,098
($130,520 x 115%)
Withdrawals reduce the Future Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal.
During any subsequent Waiting Periods, if you elect to reset the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value, the Future Protected Income Base will equal 115% of the Contract Value on the date of the reset and a new Waiting Period will begin. See Resets of the Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value below.
In all situations, the Future Protected Income Base is subject to the Maximum Protected Income Base described below. The Future Protected Income Base is never available to the Contractowner to establish a 4LATER® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, but is the value the Protected Income Base will become at the end of the Waiting Period.
Maximum Protected Income Base. The Maximum Protected Income Base is equal to 200% of the Protected Income Base on the 4LATER® Effective Date. The Maximum Protected Income Base will be increased by 200% of any additional Purchase Payments and corresponding Bonus Credits. In all circumstances, the Maximum Protected Income Base can never exceed $10 million. This maximum takes into consideration the combined guaranteed amounts from any Living Benefit Riders under all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) owned by you or on which you are the Annuitant.
After a reset to the current Contract Value, the Maximum Protected Income Base will equal 200% of the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the reset not to exceed $10 million.
Each withdrawal will reduce the Maximum Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal.
Example: 
Protected Income Base
$104,000
Maximum Protected Income Base
$208,000
Purchase Payment and corresponding Bonus
Credit in Year 2
$10,400
Increase to Maximum Protected Income Base
$20,800
New Protected Income Base
$114,400
New Maximum Protected Income Base
$228,800
Future Protected Income Base after Purchase
Payment
$130,520
Maximum Protected Income Base
$228,800
Protected Income Base (after 1st Waiting
Period)
$130,520
 
Future Protected Income Base (during 2nd
Waiting Period)
$150,098
Maximum Protected Income Base
$228,800
Contract Value in Year 4
$112,000
 
Withdrawal of 10%
$11,200
 
After Withdrawal (10% adjustment)
 
Contract Value
$100,800
 
Protected Income Base
$117,468
 
Future Protected Income Base
$135,088
Maximum Protected Income Base
$205,920
Resets of the Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value (“Resets”). You may elect to reset the Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value at any time after the initial Waiting Period following: (a) the 4LATER® Effective Date or (b) any prior reset of the Protected Income Base. Resets are subject to a maximum of $10 million and the Annuitant must be under age 81. You might consider resetting the Protected Income Base if your Contract Value has increased above the Protected Income Base (including the 15% automatic enhancements) and you want to lock-in this increased amount to use when setting the Guaranteed Income Benefit. If the Protected Income Base is reset to the Contract Value, the 15% automatic enhancement will not apply until the end of the next Waiting Period.
This reset may be elected by sending a written request to our Home Office or by specifying at the time of purchase that you would like us to administer this reset election for you. If you want us to administer this reset for you, at the end of each 3-year Waiting Period, if the Contract Value is higher than the Protected Income Base (after the Protected Income Base has been reset to the Future Protected Income Base), we will implement this election and the Protected Income Base will be equal to the Contract Value on that date. We will
C-18
notify you that a reset has occurred. This will continue until you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, the Annuitant reaches age 81, or you reach the Maximum Protected Income Base. If we administer this reset election for you, you have 30 days after the election to notify us if you wish to reverse this election and have your Protected Income Base increased to the Future Protected Income Base instead. You may wish to reverse this election if you are not interested in the increased charge. If the Contract Value is less than the Protected Income Base on any reset date, we will not administer this reset. We will not attempt to administer another reset until the end of the next 3-year Waiting Period; however, you have the option to request a reset during this period by sending a written request to our Home Office.
At the time of the reset, a new Waiting Period will begin. Subsequent resets may be elected at the end of each new Waiting Period. The reset will be effective on the next Valuation Date after notice of the reset is approved by us.
We reserve the right to restrict resets to Benefit Year anniversaries. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the 4LATER® Effective Date and starting with each anniversary of the 4LATER® Effective Date after that. If the Contractowner elects to reset the Protected Income Base, the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the reset and each anniversary of the effective date of the reset after that.
NOTE: If you plan to elect i4LIFE® Advantage within three years of the issue date of 4LATER® Advantage, you will not receive the benefit of the Future Protected Income Base.
4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit
When you are ready to elect i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments, the greater of the Protected Income Base accumulated under 4LATER® or the Contract Value will be used to calculate the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit. The 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is a minimum payout floor for your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit will be determined by dividing the greater of the Protected Income Base or Contract Value (or Guaranteed Amount if applicable) on the Periodic Income Commencement Date, by 1,000 and multiplying the result by the rate per $1,000 from the Guaranteed Income Benefit Table in your 4LATER® rider. If the Contract Value is used to establish the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, this rate provides a Guaranteed Income Benefit not less than 75% of the initial i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment (which is also based on the Contract Value). If the Protected Income Base is used to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit (because it is larger than the Contract Value), the resulting Guaranteed Income Benefit will be more than 75% of the initial i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment.
If the amount of your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment (which is based on your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value) has fallen below the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, because of poor investment results, a payment equal to the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is the minimum payment you will receive. If the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is paid, it will be paid with the same frequency as your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment. If your Regular Income Payment is less than the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will reduce your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value by the Regular Income Payment plus an additional amount equal to the difference between your Regular Income Payment and the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit. This withdrawal from your Account Value will be made from the Subaccounts and the fixed account proportionately according to your investment allocations.
The following example illustrates how poor investment performance, which results in a Guaranteed Income Benefit payment, affects the i4LIFE® Account Value: 
i4LIFE® Account Value before market decline
$135,000
i4LIFE® Account Value after market decline
$100,000
Guaranteed Income Benefit
$810
Regular Income Payment after market decline
$769
Account Value after market decline and Guaranteed Income Benefit
payment
$99,190
If your Account Value reaches zero as a result of withdrawals to provide the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will continue to pay you an amount equal to the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit.
When your Account Value reaches zero, your i4LIFE® Advantage Access Period will end and the i4LIFE® Advantage Lifetime Income Period will begin. Additional amounts withdrawn from the Account Value to provide the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit may terminate your Access Period earlier than originally scheduled and will reduce your Death Benefit. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits. After the Access Period ends, we will continue to pay the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit for as long as the Annuitant (or the Secondary Life, if applicable) is living (i.e., the i4LIFE® Advantage Lifetime Income Period). If your Account Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid.
If the market performance in your Contract is sufficient to provide Regular Income Payments at a level that exceeds the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit will never come into effect.
C-19
The 4LATER® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step-up every three years to 75% of the then current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit. The step-up will occur on every third Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary for 15 years. At the end of a 15-year step-up period, the Contractowner may elect a new 15-year step-up period by submitting a written request to the Home Office. If you prefer, when you start the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you can request that Lincoln Life administer this election for you.
Additional Purchase Payments cannot be made to your Contract after the Periodic Income Commencement Date. The 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is reduced by withdrawals (other than Regular Income Payments) in the same proportion that the withdrawals reduce the Account Value. You may want to discuss the impact of additional withdrawals with your registered representative.
Termination. After the later of the third anniversary of the 4LATER® rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset, the 4LATER® rider may be terminated upon written notice to us. Prior to the Periodic Income Commencement Date, 4LATER® will automatically terminate upon any of the following events:
●
termination of the Contract to which the 4LATER® rider is attached;
●
the change of or the death of the Annuitant (except if the surviving spouse assumes ownership of the Contract and the role of the Annuitant upon death of the Contractowner); or
●
the change of Contractowner (except if the surviving spouse assumes ownership of the Contract and the role of Annuitant upon the death of the Contractowner), including the assignment of the Contract; or
●
the last day that you can elect i4LIFE® Advantage (age 85 for qualified contracts and age 99 for nonqualified contracts).
After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, the 4LATER® rider will terminate due to any of the following events:
●
the death of the Annuitant (or, the later of the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life if a joint payout was elected); or
●
a Contractowner requested decrease in the Access Period or a change to the Regular Income Payment frequency.
A termination due to a decrease in the Access Period, a change in the Regular Income Payment frequency, or upon written notice from the Contractowner will be effective as of the Valuation Date on the next Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. Termination will be only for the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit and not the i4LIFE® Advantage election, unless otherwise specified.
If you terminate the 4LATER® rider on or after the Periodic Income Commencement Date, you cannot re-elect it.
C-20
Appendix D — Lincoln Life Individual Variable Annuity Contracts Eligible for Inclusion in Owner’s Investment
 
 
The American Legacy®
American Legacy II®
American Legacy III®
American Legacy III® B-Class
American Legacy III® C-Share
American Legacy III® Plus
American Legacy III® View
American Legacy® Advisory
American Legacy Shareholder’s Advantage®
American Legacy Shareholder’s Advantage® A-Class
American Legacy® Design
American Legacy® Signature
American Legacy® Fusion
American Legacy® Series
American Legacy® Target Date Income B-Share
American Legacy® Target Date Income Advisory
Multi-Fund®
Multi-Fund® 5
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Access
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Bonus
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM II
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM II Access
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM II Bonus
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM II Advance
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Advisory
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (A-Share)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (A-Class)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (B-Share)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (B-Class)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (C-Share)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (L-Share)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (Bonus)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM (Prime)
Lincoln ChoicePlus AssuranceSM Series
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Design
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Rollover
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Signature
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Fusion
Lincoln ChoicePlusSM Select B-Share
Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM
Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM RIA
Lincoln Investor Advantage®
Lincoln Investor Advantage® Advisory
Lincoln Investor Advantage® Advisory Choice
Lincoln Investor Advantage® Fee-Based
Lincoln Investor Advantage® Pro
Lincoln Investor Advantage® Pro Advisory
Lincoln Investor Advantage® Pro Advisory Choice
Lincoln Investor Advantage® RIA
Lincoln Investor Advantage® RIA Class
D-1
Appendix E — Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages for Previous Rider Elections
 
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages by Ages:
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections with applications and/or rider election forms signed between August 19, 2024 and April 30, 2025 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option
Age
GIB Percentage*
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
GIB Percentage*
Under age 40
2.25%
Under age 40
2.00%
40 – 54
3.00%
40 – 54
2.50%
55 – 58
3.25%
55 – 58
2.75%
59 – 64
4.00%
59 – 64
3.50%
65 – 69
5.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 79
5.25%
70 – 79
4.75%
80+
5.25%
80+
4.75%
*If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections for applications and/or rider election forms signed between November 18, 2019 and May 18, 2020 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option**
Age
GIB Percentage*
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
GIB Percentage*
Under age 40
2.50%
Under age 40
2.50%
40 – 54
3.00%
40 – 54
2.75%
55 – 58
3.25%
55 – 58
3.00%
59 – 64
3.75%
59 – 64
3.50%
65 – 69
4.25%
65 – 69
4.00%
70 – 74
5.00%
70 – 74
4.25%
75 – 79
5.00%
75 – 79
4.75%
80+
5.25%
80+
5.00%
*If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections between October 3, 2016 and November 17, 2019. 
Single & Joint Life Option**
Single & Joint Life Option**
Age
GIB Percentage*
Under age 40
2.50%
40 – 54
3.00%
55 – 58
3.50%
59 – 64
4.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 79
5.00%
80+
5.50%
*In order to have received the percentage indicated, your rider election form must have been signed or dated on or before the last day of the effective period noted above.
**If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.
E-1
 
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages by Ages:
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections on or after May 20, 2013. 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option
Age
Percentage of Account
Value, Protected Income Base or
Guaranteed Amount
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
Percentage of Account
Value, Protected Income Base or
Guaranteed Amount
Under age 40
2.00%
Under age 40
2.00%
40 – 54
2.50%
40 – 54
2.50%
55 – 58
3.00%
55 – 58
3.00%
59 – 64
3.50%
59 – 69
3.50%
65 – 69
4.00%
70 – 74
4.00%
70 – 74
4.50%
75+
4.50%
75+
5.00%
 
 
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections between May 21, 2012 and May 19, 2013. 
Single & Joint Life Option*
Single & Joint Life Option*
Age
Percentage of Account
Value, Protected Income Base or
Guaranteed Amount
Under age 40
2.00%
40 – 54
2.50%
55 – 58
3.00%
59 – 64
3.50%
65 – 69
4.00%
70 – 74
4.50%
75+
5.00%
 
*
If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections prior to May 21, 2012. 
Single & Joint Life Option*
Single & Joint Life Option*
Age
Percentage of Account
Value, Protected Income Base or
Guaranteed Amount
Under age 40
2.50%
40 – 54
3.00%
55 – 58
3.50%
59 – 64
4.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 79
5.00%
80+
5.50%
 
*
If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.
E-2
Appendix F — Current Rider Charges for Previous Elections
The following tables reflect the current charge for optional Living Benefit Riders by election date. The current charges for new elections are disclosed in a Rate Sheet supplement.
Optional Protected Lifetime Income Fees:
 
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit
 
 
Single
Life
Joint
Life
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit riders elected between August 19, 2024 and April 30,
2025
1.15%
1.35%
F-1
The SAI includes additional information about the Contract, Lincoln Life, and the VAA, and is incorporated by reference in this prospectus. The SAI is dated the same date as this prospectus. We will provide the SAI without charge upon request. You may obtain a free copy of the SAI and submit inquiries by:
●
Mailing: The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, PO Box 2348, Fort Wayne, IN 46801-2348
●
Visiting: www.lfg.com/VAprospectus
●
●
Calling: 1-800-942-5500
You may also obtain reports and other information about the VAA on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic request at the following email address: [email protected]. The SEC file numbers and the Contract’s contract identifier number are listed below.
 
SEC File Nos. 333-35780; 811-05721
EDGAR Contract Identifier C000007626
STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (SAI)
Dated May 1, 2025
Relating to Prospectus Dated May 1, 2025 for
American Legacy III® Plus
Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H, Registrant
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, Depositor
The SAI provides you with additional information about Lincoln Life, the VAA, and your Contract. It is not a prospectus.
A copy of the product prospectus dated May 1, 2025, may be obtained without a charge by writing to the Home Office: Lincoln Life Customer Service, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, PO Box 2348, Fort Wayne, IN 46801-2348, by calling: 1-800-942-5500, or by emailing: [email protected] and requesting a copy of the American Legacy III® Plus product prospectus.
TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE SAI
 
Special Terms
The special terms used in this SAI are the ones defined in the prospectus.
General Information and History
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company), organized in 1905, is an Indiana-domiciled insurance company, engaged primarily in the direct issuance of life insurance contracts and annuities. Lincoln Life is wholly owned by Lincoln National Corporation (LNC), a publicly held insurance and financial services holding company incorporated in Indiana. Lincoln Life is obligated to pay all amounts promised to Contractowners under the contracts.
Our Financial Condition. Depending on when you purchased your Contract, you may be permitted to make allocations to the fixed account, which is part of our general account. See The Fixed Side of the Contract. In addition, any guarantees under the Contract that exceed your Contract Value, such as those associated with Death Benefit options and Living Benefit Riders are paid from our general account (not the VAA). Therefore, any amounts that we may pay under the Contract in excess of Contract Value are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our long-term ability to make such payments. We issue other types of insurance policies and financial products in addition to the Contract. We also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the general account. Moreover, unlike assets held in the VAA, the assets of the general account are subject to the general liabilities of the Company and, therefore, to the Company’s general creditors. In the event of an insolvency or receivership, payments we make from our general account to satisfy claims under the Contract would generally receive the same priority as our other Contractowner obligations.
The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the Indiana Insurance Department as well as the insurance laws and regulations of the jurisdictions in which the contracts are distributed. The laws and regulations applicable to us regulate the investments we can make with assets held in our general account. In general, those laws and regulations determine the amount and type of investments which we can make with general account assets.
In addition, state insurance regulations require that insurance companies calculate and establish on their financial statements, a specified amount of reserves in order to meet the contractual obligations to pay the claims of our Contractowners. In order to meet our claims-paying obligations, we regularly monitor our reserves to ensure we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected contract and claims payments. However, it is important to note that there is no guarantee that we will always be able to meet our claims paying obligations, and that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.
State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital in excess of liabilities, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on assets held in our general account, which include bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in value of these investments resulting from a loss in their market value.
How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective Contractowners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on both a statutory basis and according to Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Our audited GAAP financial statements, as well as the financial statements of the VAA, are located in the SAI. Instructions on how to obtain a free copy of the SAI, are provided on the last page of this prospectus. You may obtain our audited statutory financial statements and any unaudited statutory financial statements that may be available by visiting our website at www.LincolnFinancial.com.
You also will find on our website information on ratings assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance and annuity contracts based on its financial strength and/or claims-paying ability. Additional information about rating agencies is included in the SAI.
Lincoln Financial Group is the marketing name for Lincoln National Corporation (NYSE:LNC) and its affiliates. Through its affiliates, Lincoln Financial Group offers annuities, life, group life and disability insurance, 401(k) and 403(b) plans, and comprehensive financial planning and advisory services.
Variable Annuity Account (VAA)
On February 7, 1989, the VAA was established as an insurance company separate account under Indiana law. It is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the provisions of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (1940 Act). The VAA is a segregated investment account. Income, gains and losses credited to, or charged against, the VAA reflect the VAA’s own investment experience
B-2
and not the investment experience of Lincoln Life’s other assets. The assets of the VAA may not be used to pay any liabilities of Lincoln Life other than those arising from the contracts supported by the VAA. Lincoln Life is obligated to pay all amounts promised to Contractowners under the contracts.
The VAA is used to support other annuity contracts offered by us in addition to the contracts described in this prospectus. The other annuity contracts supported by the VAA generally invest in the same funds as the contracts described in this prospectus. These other annuity contracts may have different charges that could affect the performance of their Subaccounts, and they offer different benefits.
Investment Results
At times, the VAA may compare its investment results to various unmanaged indices or other variable annuities in reports to shareholders, sales literature and advertisements. The results will be calculated on a total return basis for various periods, with or without surrender charges. Results calculated without surrender charges will be higher. Total returns include the reinvestment of all distributions, which are reflected in changes in unit value.
There can be no assurance that a money market fund will be able to maintain a stable net asset value of $1.00 per share. During periods of low interest rates, the yield of a money market fund may become extremely low and possibly negative. In addition, if the yield of a Subaccount investing in a money market fund becomes negative, due in part to contract fees and expenses, your Contract Value may decline. An investment in a money market fund is not insured or guaranteed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any other government agency. The sponsor of a money market fund has no legal obligation to provide financial support to the fund, and you should not expect that the sponsor will provide financial support to the fund at any time. If, under SEC rules, a money market fund suspends payments of redemption proceeds, we will delay payment of any transfer, withdrawal, or benefit from a Subaccount investing in the money market fund until the fund resumes payment. If, under SEC rules, a money market fund institutes a liquidity fee, we may assess the fee against your Contract Value if a payment is made to you from a Subaccount investing in the money market fund.
The annual performance of the Subaccounts is based on past performance and does not indicate or represent future performance.
Capital Markets
In any particular year, our capital may increase or decrease depending on a variety of factors — the amount of our statutory income or losses (which is sensitive to equity market and credit market conditions), the amount of additional capital we must hold to support business growth, changes in reserving requirements, our inability to secure capital market solutions to provide reserve relief, such as issuing letters of credit to support captive reinsurance structures, changes in equity market levels, the value of certain fixed-income and equity securities in our investment portfolio and changes in interest rates.
Advertising & Ratings
We may include in certain advertisements, endorsements in the form of a list of organizations, individuals or other parties which recommend Lincoln Life or the policies. Furthermore, we may occasionally include in advertisements comparisons of currently taxable and tax deferred investment programs, based on selected tax brackets, or discussions of alternative investment vehicles and general economic conditions.
Our financial strength is ranked and rated by nationally recognized independent rating agencies. The ratings do not imply approval of the product and do not refer to the performance of the product, or any separate account, including the underlying investment options. Ratings are not recommendations to buy our products. Each of the rating agencies reviews its ratings periodically. Accordingly, all ratings are subject to revision or withdrawal at any time by the rating agencies, and therefore, no assurance can be given that these ratings will be maintained. Our insurer financial strength ratings are all on outlook stable except the rating assigned by AM Best for First Penn Pacific Life Insurance Company, which is on outlook negative. Our financial strength ratings, which are intended to measure our ability to meet contract holder obligations, are an important factor affecting public confidence in most of our products and, as a result, our competitiveness. A downgrade of our financial strength rating could affect our competitive position in the insurance industry by making it more difficult for us to market our products as potential customers may select companies with higher financial strength ratings and by leading to increased withdrawals by current customers seeking companies with higher financial strength ratings. For more information on ratings, including outlooks, see https://www.lfg.com/public/aboutus/investorrelations/financialinformation/ratings.
Non-Principal Risks of Investing In The Contract
Opportunity Cost. Principal amounts committed to an annuity contract are only available to choose from investment options available on the Contract, potentially causing you an opportunity cost.
Dying early. If you die earlier than expected, your designated beneficiary may not receive the full benefit of the future payments.
B-3
Divorce. If you get divorced, you could forfeit some or all of the value of your annuity to your former spouse.
Affiliated Funds. We may have incentive to select affiliated funds because we receive more revenue from an affiliated fund than a non-affiliated fund.
Fund of Funds. In some fund of funds (or master-feeder) arrangements, you may pay fees and expenses at both fund levels, which can reduce your investment return.
Services
Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, One Commerce Square, 2005 Market Street, Suite 700, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 19103, has audited a) the financial statements of each of the subaccounts listed in the appendix to the opinion that comprise Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H, as of December 31, 2024, the related statements of operations and the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods indicated in the appendix to the opinion; and b) the consolidated financial statements of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2024 and 2023 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2024 as set forth in their reports, which are included in this SAI and Registration Statement. The aforementioned financial statements are included herein in reliance on Ernst & Young LLP's reports, given on their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.
Keeper of Records
All accounts, books, records and other documents which are required to be maintained for the VAA are maintained by us or by third parties responsible to Lincoln Life. We have entered into an agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company, 2323 Grand Boulevard, 5th Floor, Kansas City, MO 64108, to provide accounting services to the VAA. No separate charge against the assets of the VAA is made by us for this service.
Purchase of Securities Being Offered
The variable annuity contracts are offered to the public through licensed insurance agents who specialize in selling our products; through independent insurance brokers; and through certain securities brokers/dealers selected by us whose personnel are legally authorized to sell annuity products. There are no special purchase plans for any class of prospective buyers. However, under certain limited circumstances described in the prospectus under the section Charges and Other Deductions, any applicable account fee and/or surrender charge may be reduced or waived.
Both before and after the Annuity Commencement Date, there are exchange privileges between Subaccounts, and from the VAA to the general account (if available) subject to restrictions set out in the prospectus. See The Contracts, in the prospectus. No exchanges are permitted between the VAA and other separate accounts.
The offering of the contracts is continuous.
Principal Underwriter
Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) is a wholly owned subsidiary of Lincoln National Corporation and an affiliate of Lincoln Life. LFD serves as the principal underwriter (the “Principal Underwriter”) for the contracts, as described in the prospectus. The Principal Underwriter currently offers, and expects to continue offering, the contracts to the public on a continuous basis, but reserves the right to discontinue offering the contracts at any time. Prior to May 6, 2024, the Principal Underwriter offered the contracts through sales representatives who were registered with either Lincoln Financial Advisors Corporation (“LFA”) or Lincoln Financial Securities Corporation (“LFN”) (collectively “LFN”), each an affiliate of LFD. The Principal Underwriter has also entered into selling agreements with other broker-dealers (“Selling Firms”) for the sale of the contracts. Sales representatives who are registered with Selling Firms are appointed as our insurance agents. LFD, in its capacity as Principal Underwriter, paid to LFN and Selling Firms, sales compensation totaling $240,217,121 in 2022, $214,270,291 in 2023 and $226,379,546 in 2024, in connection with all of the contracts offered under the VAA. The Principal Underwriter retained no underwriting commissions for the sale of the contracts. LFD maintains its principal place of business at 130 North Radnor Chester Road, Radnor, Pennsylvania 19087.
B-4
Contract Information
Interest Adjustment Example
Note: This example is intended to show how the Interest Adjustment calculation impacts the surrender value of a representative contract. The surrender charges, annual account fee, adjustment factor, and guaranteed minimum interest rate values shown here are generally different from those that apply to specific contracts, particularly those contracts that deduct an initial sales load or pay a bonus on deposits. Calculations of the Interest Adjustment in your Contract, if applicable, will be based on the factors applicable to your Contract. The Interest Adjustment may be referred to as a Market Value Adjustment in your Contract.
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS FOR MALE 35 ISSUE
CASH SURRENDER VALUES 
Single Premium
$50,000
Premium taxes
None
Withdrawals
None
Guaranteed Period
5 years
Guaranteed Interest Rate
3.50%
Annuity Date
Age 70
Index Rate A
3.50%
Index Rate B
4.00% End of Contract Year 1
3.50% End of Contract Year 2
3.00% End of Contract Year 3
2.00% End of Contract Year 4
Percentage adjustment to B
0.50%
 
Interest Adjustment Formula
(1 + Index A)n
-1
n = Remaining Guaranteed Period
(1 + Index B + % Adjustment)n
SURRENDER VALUE CALCULATION 
Contract Year
(1)
Annuity
Value
(2)
1 + Interest
Adjustment Formula
(3)
Adjusted
Annuity
Value
(4)
Minimum
Value
(5)
Greater of
(3) & (4)
(6)
Surrender
Charge
(7)
Surrender
Value
1
$51,710
0.962268
$49,759
$50,710
$50,710
$4,250
$46,460
2
$53,480
0.985646
$52,712
$51,431
$52,712
$4,250
$48,462
3
$55,312
1.000000
$55,312
$52,162
$55,312
$4,000
$51,312
4
$57,208
1.009756
$57,766
$52,905
$57,766
$3,500
$54,266
5
$59,170
N/A
$59,170
$53,658
$59,170
$3,000
$56,170
ANNUITY VALUE CALCULATION 
Contract Year
BOY*
Annuity
Value
 
Guaranteed
Interest Rate
 
Annual
Account
Fee
 
EOY**
Annuity
Value
1
$50,000
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$51,710
2
$51,710
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$53,480
3
$53,480
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$55,312
4
$55,312
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$57,208
5
$57,208
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$59,170
B-5
SURRENDER CHARGE CALCULATION 
Contract Year
Surrender
Charge
Factor
 
Deposit
 
Surrender
Charge
1
8.5%
x
$50,000
=
$4,250
2
8.5%
x
$50,000
=
$4,250
3
8.0%
x
$50,000
=
$4,000
4
7.0%
x
$50,000
=
$3,500
5
6.0%
x
$50,000
=
$3,000
1 + INTEREST ADJUSTMENT FORMULA CALCULATION 
Contract Year
Index A
Index B
Adj Index B
N
Result
1
3.50
%
4.00
%
4.50
%
4
0.962268
2
3.50
%
3.50
%
4.00
%
3
0.985646
3
3.50
%
3.00
%
3.50
%
2
1.000000
4
3.50
%
2.00
%
2.50
%
1
1.009756
5
3.50
%
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MINIMUM VALUE CALCULATION 
Contract Year
 
 
Minimum
Guaranteed
Interest Rate
 
Annual
Account
Fee
 
Minimum
Value
1
$50,000
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$50,710
2
$50,710
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$51,431
3
$51,431
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$52,162
4
$52,162
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$52,905
5
$52,905
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$53,658
 
*
BOY = beginning of year
 
**
EOY = end of year
Additional Services
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA)—You may systematically transfer, on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available, amounts from certain Subaccounts, or the fixed side (if available) of the contract into the Subaccounts or in accordance with other terms we make available. You may elect to participate in the DCA program at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by completing an election form available from us. The minimum amount to be dollar cost averaged is $1,500 over any time period between six and 60 months. We may offer different time periods for new Purchase Payments and for transfers of Contract Value. State variations may exist. Once elected, the program will remain in effect until the earlier of:
●
the Annuity Commencement Date;
●
the value of the amount being DCA'd is depleted; or
●
you cancel the program by written request or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file.
We reserve the right to discontinue or restrict access to this program at any time.
A transfer made as part of this program is not considered a transfer for purposes of limiting the number of transfers that may be made, or assessing any charges or Interest Adjustment which may apply to transfers. Upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment allocated to the DCA fixed account, the existing program duration will be extended to reflect the end date of the new DCA program. However, the existing interest crediting rate will not be extended. The existing interest crediting rate will expire at its originally scheduled expiration date and the value remaining in the DCA account from the original amount as well as any additional Purchase Payments will be credited with interest at the standard DCA rate at the time. DCA does not assure a profit or protect against loss.
Automatic Withdrawal Service (AWS)—AWS provides an automatic, periodic withdrawal of Contract Value to you. AWS may take place on either a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis, as selected by the Contractowner. You may elect to participate in AWS at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by sending a written request to us. The minimum Contract Value required to establish AWS is $10,000. You may cancel or make changes to your AWS program at any time by sending a written request to us. If telephone authorization has been elected, certain changes may be made by telephone. Notwithstanding the requirements of the program, any withdrawal must be permitted under Section 401(a)(9) of the IRC for qualified plans or
B-6
permitted under Section 72 of the IRC for nonqualified contracts. To the extent that withdrawals under AWS do not qualify for an exemption from the contingent deferred sales charge, we will assess any applicable surrender charges on those withdrawals. See Surrender Charge.
Cross Reinvestment Program/Earnings Sweep Program — Under this option, Account Value in a designated variable Subaccount of the contract that exceeds a certain baseline amount is automatically transferred to another specific variable Subaccount(s) of the contract at specific intervals. You may elect to participate in the cross reinvestment program at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by sending a written request to us or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file. You designate the holding account, the receiving account(s), and the baseline amount. Cross reinvestment will continue until we receive authorization to terminate the program.
The cross reinvestment service is no longer available unless the Contractowner was enrolled in this service prior to May 1, 2010. Contractowners who are currently enrolled in this service will not be impacted by this change.
Portfolio Rebalancing — Portfolio rebalancing is an option, which, if elected by the Contractowner, restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of the Contract Value (or Account Value under i4LIFE® Advantage), allocated to each variable Subaccount. This pre-determined level will be the allocation initially selected when the Contract was purchased, unless subsequently changed. The portfolio rebalancing allocation may be changed at any time by submitting a written request to us. If portfolio rebalancing is elected, all Purchase Payments allocated to the variable Subaccounts must be subject to portfolio rebalancing. Portfolio rebalancing may take place on either a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis, as selected by the Contractowner. The Contractowner may terminate the portfolio rebalancing program or re-enroll at any time by sending a written request to us. If telephone authorization has been elected, the Contractowner may make these elections by phone. The portfolio rebalancing program is not available following the Annuity Commencement Date.
Please note that all of the services discussed in this section will stop once we become aware of a pending death claim.
SecureLine® Account – SecureLine® is an interest bearing draft account established from the proceeds payable on a Contract administered by us that helps you manage your surrender or death benefit proceeds. You are the owner of the account, and are the only one authorized to transfer proceeds from the account. You may choose to leave the proceeds in this account, or you may use the checkbook we previously provided and write checks against the account until the funds are depleted. The SecureLine® account is part of our general account. It is not a bank account and it is not insured by the FDIC or any other government agency. As part of our general account, it is subject to the claims of our creditors. We receive a benefit from all amounts left in the SecureLine® account.
Interest credited in the SecureLine® account is taxable as ordinary income in the year such interest is credited, and is not tax deferred. We recommend that you consult your tax advisor to determine the tax consequences associated with the payment of interest on amounts in the SecureLine® account. The balance in your SecureLine® account began earning interest the day your account was opened and will continue to earn interest until all funds are withdrawn. Interest is compounded daily and credited to your account on the last day of each month. The interest rate will be updated monthly and we may increase or decrease the rate at our discretion. The interest rate credited to your SecureLine® account may be more or less than the rate earned on funds held in our general account. The interest rate offered with a SecureLine® account is not necessarily that credited to the fixed account. There are no monthly fees. You may be charged a fee if you stop a payment or if you present a check for payment without sufficient funds.
Other Information
Due to differences in redemption rates, tax treatment or other considerations, the interests of policyholders under the variable life accounts could conflict with those of Contractowners under the VAA. In those cases, where assets from variable life and variable annuity separate accounts are invested in the same fund(s) (i.e., where mixed funding occurs), the Boards of Directors of the fund involved will monitor for any material conflicts and determine what action, if any, should be taken. If it becomes necessary for any separate account to replace shares of any fund with another investment, that fund may have to liquidate securities on a disadvantageous basis. Refer to the prospectus for each fund for more information about mixed funding.
Determination of Accumulation and Annuity Unit Value
A description of the days on which Accumulation and Annuity Units will be valued is given in the prospectus. The New York Stock Exchange's (NYSE) most recent announcement (which is subject to change) states that it will be closed on weekends and on these holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Day, President's Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Juneteenth, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. If any of these holidays occurs on a weekend day, the Exchange may also be closed on the business day occurring just before or just after the holiday. It may also be closed on other days.
Since the portfolios of some of the funds and series will consist of securities primarily listed on foreign exchanges or otherwise traded outside the United States, those securities may be traded (and the net asset value of those funds and series and of the variable account could therefore be significantly affected) on days when the investor has no access to those funds and series.
B-7
Annuity Payments
Variable Annuity Payouts
Variable Annuity Payouts will be determined on the basis of:
●
the dollar value of the Contract on the Annuity Commencement Date less any applicable premium tax (and less any surrender charges on purchase payments in the contract for less than 12 months if bonus credits applied to the purchase payments);
●
the annuity tables contained in the Contract;
●
the type of annuity option selected; and
●
the investment results of the fund(s) selected.
In order to determine the amount of variable Annuity Payouts, we make the following calculation:
●
first, we determine the dollar amount of the first payout;
●
second, we credit the Contract with a fixed number of Annuity Units based on the amount of the first payout; and
●
third, we calculate the value of the Annuity Units each period thereafter.
These steps are explained below.
The dollar amount of the first periodic variable Annuity Payout is determined by applying the total value of the Accumulation Units credited under the Contract valued as of the Annuity Commencement Date (less any premium taxes) to the annuity tables contained in the Contract. The first variable Annuity Payout will be paid 14 days after the Annuity Commencement Date. This day of the month will become the day on which all future Annuity Payouts will be paid. Amounts shown in the tables are based on the 1983 Table “a” Individual Annuity Mortality Tables, modified, with an assumed investment return at the rate of 3%, 4%, 5% or 6% per annum, depending on the terms of your Contract. The first Annuity Payout is determined by multiplying the benefit per $1,000 of value shown in the contract tables by the number of thousands of dollars of value accumulated under the Contract. These annuity tables vary according to the form of annuity selected and the age of the Annuitant at the Annuity Commencement Date. The assumed interest rate is the measuring point for subsequent Annuity Payouts. If the actual net investment rate (annualized) exceeds the assumed interest rate, the payout will increase at a rate equal to the amount of such excess.
Conversely, if the actual rate is less than the assumed interest rate, Annuity Payouts will decrease. If the assumed rate of interest were to be increased, Annuity Payouts would start at a higher level but would decrease more rapidly or increase more slowly.
We may use sex-distinct annuity tables in contracts that are not associated with employer sponsored plans and where not prohibited by law.
At an Annuity Commencement Date, the Contract is credited with Annuity Units for each Subaccount on which variable Annuity Payouts are based. The number of Annuity Units to be credited is determined by dividing the amount of the first periodic payout by the value of an Annuity Unit in each Subaccount selected. Although the number of Annuity Units is fixed by this process, the value of such units will vary with the value of the underlying fund. The amount of the second and subsequent periodic payouts is determined by multiplying the Contractowner’s fixed number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount by the appropriate Annuity Unit value for the Valuation Date ending 14 days prior to the date that payout is due.
The value of each Subaccount’s Annuity Unit will be set initially at $1.00. The Annuity Unit value for each Subaccount at the end of any Valuation Date is determined by multiplying the Subaccount Annuity Unit value for the immediately preceding Valuation Date by the product of:
●
The net investment factor of the Subaccount for the Valuation Period for which the Annuity Unit value is being determined, and
●
A factor to neutralize the assumed investment return in the annuity table.
The value of the Annuity Units is determined as of a Valuation Date 14 days prior to the payment date in order to permit calculation of amounts of Annuity Payouts and mailing of checks in advance of their due dates. Such checks will normally be issued and mailed at least three days before the due date.
Financial Statements
The December 31, 2024 financial statements of the VAA and the December 31, 2024 consolidated financial statements of Lincoln Life are incorporated into this SAI by reference to the VAA’s most recent Form N-VPFS (“Form N-VPFS”) filed with the SEC.
B-8
Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H
PART C - OTHER INFORMATION
Item 27. Exhibits
(b) None.
B-2
B-3
(h) Fund Participation Agreements among The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and:
(j) Rule 22c-2 Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and:
(m) Not applicable
(n) Not applicable
(o) Not applicable
Item 28. Directors and Officers of the Depositor
The following list contains the officers and directors of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company who are engaged directly or indirectly in activities relating to Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H as well as the contracts. The list also shows The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company's executive officers.  
B-4
Name
Positions and Offices with Depositor
Craig T. Beazer*
Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Director
Jayson R. Bronchetti*
Executive Vice President, Chief Investment Officer and Director
Adam M. Cohen*
Senior Vice President, Chief Accounting Officer and Treasurer
Ellen G. Cooper*
President and Director
Stephen B. Harris*
Senior Vice President and Chief Ethics and Compliance Officer
Christopher M. Neczypor*
Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Director
Nancy A. Smith*
Senior Vice President and Secretary
Joseph D. Spada**
Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer for Separate Accounts
Eric B. Wilmer***
Assistant Vice President and Director
*Principal business address is 150 N. Radnor-Chester Road, Radnor, PA 19087
**Principal business address is 350 Church Street, Hartford, CT 06103
***Principal business address is 1301 South Harrison Street, Fort Wayne, IN 46802
Item 29. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control with the Depositor or Registrant
Item 30. Indemnification
a) Brief description of indemnification provisions.
In general, Article VII of the By-Laws of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company) provides that Lincoln Life will indemnify certain persons against expenses, judgments and certain other specified costs incurred by any such person if he/she is made a party or is threatened to be made a party to a suit or proceeding because he/she was a director, officer, or employee of Lincoln Life, as long as he/she acted in good faith and in a manner he/she reasonably believed to be in the best interests of, or act opposed to the best interests of, Lincoln Life. Certain additional conditions apply to indemnification in criminal proceedings.
In particular, separate conditions govern indemnification of directors, officers, and employees of Lincoln Life in connection with suits by, or in the right of, Lincoln Life.
Please refer to Article VII of the By-Laws of Lincoln Life (Exhibit no. f(b) hereto) for the full text of the indemnification provisions. Indemnification is permitted by, and is subject to the requirements of, Indiana law.
b) Undertaking pursuant to Rule 484 of Regulation C under the Securities Act of 1933:
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the provisions described in Item 28(a) above or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any such action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
Item 31. Principal Underwriter
(a) Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) currently serves as Principal Underwriter for: Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account C; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account D; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account F; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account G; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H; Lincoln Life & Annuity Variable Annuity Account H; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account J; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account K; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account L; Lincoln Life & Annuity Variable Annuity Account L; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account M; Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account M; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N; Lincoln New York Account N for Variable Annuities; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account Q; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account R; LLANY Separate Account R for Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account S; LLANY Separate Account S for Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account T; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account W; and
B-5
Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account Y and Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account Y; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JF-H; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JF-I; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JF-A; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JF-C; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JL-A; Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JA-B; Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust; Lincoln Advisors Trust.
(b) Officers and Directors of Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc.: 
Name
Positions and Offices with Underwriter
Adam M. Cohen*
Senior Vice President and Treasurer
Jason M. Gibson**
Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer
Claire H. Hanna*
Secretary
John C. Kennedy*
President, Chief Executive Officer and Director
Jared M. Nepa*
Senior Vice President and Director
Timothy J. Seifert Sr*
Senior Vice President and Director
Vacant
Senior Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and Head of Financial
Institutions Group
*Principal business address is 150 N. Radnor-Chester Road, Radnor, PA 19087
**Principal business address is 1301 South Harrison Street, Fort Wayne, IN 46802
(c) N/A
Item 32. Location of Accounts and Records
This information is provided in the Registrant’s most recent report on Form N-CEN.
Item 33. Management Services
Not Applicable.
Item 34. Fee Representation
Lincoln Life represents that the fees and charges deducted under the contracts, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Lincoln Life.
B-6

 

SIGNATURES

 

(a)As required by the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, each Registrant certifies that it meets the requirements of Securities Act Rule 485(b) for effectiveness of these registration statements and has caused these Post-Effective Amendments to the registration statements to be signed on its behalf, in the City of Fort Wayne, and the State of Indiana on this 6th day of April, 2025 at 8:57 am.

 

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N

(Registrants)

 

  By: /s/ Delson R. Campbell
    Delson R. Campbell
    Senior Vice President, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

 

Signed on its behalf, in the City of Hartford, and the State of Connecticut on this 2nd day of April, 2025 at 3:01 pm.

 

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

(Depositor)

 

  By: /s/ Michelle L. Grindle
    Michelle L. Grindle
    (Signature-Officer of Depositor)
    Vice President, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

 

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E (File No. 811-04882; CIK: 0000804223)

 

033-26032 (Amendment No. 80)

 

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H (File No. 811-05721; CIK: 0000847552)

 

033-27783 (Amendment No. 79) 333-63505 (Amendment No. 88) 333-181615 (Amendment No. 45)
333-18419 (Amendment No. 82) 333-135219 (Amendment No. 61) 333-212681 (Amendment No. 27)
333-35780 (Amendment No. 62) 333-170695 (Amendment No. 55) 333-233762 (Amendment No. 11)
333-35784 (Amendment No. 77) 333-175888 (Amendment No. 34) 333-233764 (Amendment No. 17)
333-61592 (Amendment No. 79)    

 

Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N (File No. 811-08517; CIK: 0001048606)

 

333-36316 (Amendment No. 100) 333-172328 (Amendment No. 49) 333-214143 (Amendment No. 30)
333-36304 (Amendment No. 88) 333-174367 (Amendment No. 38) 333-214144 (Amendment No. 19)
333-40937 (Amendment No. 94) 333-181612 (Amendment No. 43) 333-214235 (Amendment No. 17)
333-61554 (Amendment No. 94) 333-186894 (Amendment No. 47) 333-236907 (Amendment No. 14)
333-135039 (Amendment No. 61) 333-193272 (Amendment No. 32) 333-239288 (Amendment No. 10)
333-138190 (Amendment No. 72) 333-193273 (Amendment No. 24) 333-252473 (Amendment No. 18)
333-149434 (Amendment No. 44) 333-193274 (Amendment No. 22) 333-252653 (Amendment No. 13)
333-170529 (Amendment No. 46) 333-212680 (Amendment No. 28) 333-252654 (Amendment No. 13)
333-170897 (Amendment No. 50) 333-212682 (Amendment No. 20)  

 

 

 

 

(b)As required by the Securities Act of 1933, these Amendments to the registration statements have been signed by the following persons in their capacities indicated on April 6, 2025 at 8:57 am.

 

Signature   Title
     
*/s/ Ellen G. Cooper   President and Director (Principal Executive Officer)
Ellen G. Cooper    
     
*/s/ Christopher M. Neczypor   Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, and Director
Christopher M. Neczypor    
     
*/s/ Craig T. Beazer   Executive Vice President and Director
Craig T. Beazer    
     
*/s/ Jayson R. Bronchetti   Executive Vice President, Chief Investment Officer, and Director
Jayson R. Bronchetti    
     
*/s/ Adam M. Cohen   Senior Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer (Principal Accounting Officer)
Adam M. Cohen    
     
*/s/ Eric B. Wilmer   Assistant Vice President and Director
Eric B. Wilmer    

 

* By /s/ Delson R. Campbell , Pursuant to a Power of Attorney
  Delson R. Campbell

 

 

 

ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS

EXHIBIT 99.B(L)(1)

EXHIBIT 99.B(L)(2)

FREE Breaking News Alerts from StreetInsider.com!

E-mail Address

StreetInsider.com Top Tickers, 7/3/2026

1. KRG
2. ALAR
3. CCH:LN
4. META
5. CCHGY
6. PRY:IM
7. PRYMY
8. SPY
9. OMV:AV
10. TEX


Serious News for Serious Traders! Try StreetInsider.com Premium Free!

You May Also Be Interested In





Related Categories

SEC Filings